DTP Final 14032011 PDF

TENDER NO: 2/CSR/LR/2011
Construction of Box-culvert on Hankaran

Nallah near Bhuri village
at
Lignite Project
Rajpardi
Tal: Jhagadia,
Dist: Bharuch
VOLUME - I
TECHNICAL BID
CLIENT:- CONSULTANT:-
Mars Planning and Engineering Services Pvt.

GUJARAT MINERAL DEVELOPMENT Ltd. , 601 Surmount Building ,
CORPORATION LIMITED Opp. Icons Mega Mall,
(A Govt. of Gujarat Enterprise) S. G. Highway
Khanij Bhavan, Near University Ground, Ahmadabad 380015
132 feet Ring Road,
Vastrapur, Ahmedabad-380 052 Phone: +91-79-40026333
Phone: (079) 27913200, 27913501
Fax No: (079) 27911454
Website www.gmdcltd.com
1
INDEX
Name of Work: T.no- 2/CSR/LR/2011, Construction of Box-culvert on Hankaran

Nallah near Bhuri village at Lignite Project, Rajpardi, Tal: Jhagadia, Dist:
Bharuch
S.N. Chapter Title & Description Page Nos.
Technical Bid.
1 - Tender Notice 3-5
2 Introduction 6-7
3 I Instruction to The Bidders 8-9
4 II Instruction to Bidders for Online Tendering 10-12
5 III Check List of Documents Enclosed With Tender 13
6 IV Criteria for Evaluation of Technical Bids (Form A 14 -18

&B)
7 V General Instructions to the Bidders 19-21
8 VI General Terms & Conditions 22-26

9 - Draft of Bank Guarantee for EMD 27
10 - Prescribed Forms for undertakings/ 28-30
declaration by bidder
11 Format for No Deviation sheet 31
12 Technical Bid- Part II 1-164

13 Technical Bid- Part II I
14 Drawings
2
e-TENDER NOTICE
GMDC, invites Online e-Tenders from reputed contractors for Construction of Box-
culvert on Hankaran Nallah near Bhuri village at Lignite Project, Rajpardi, Tal:
Jhagadia, Dist: Bharuch
01 Tender No 2/CSR/LR/2011
02 Name Of Work / Job Construction of Box-culvert on Hankaran
03 Location At lignite mines, Rajpardi Tal: Jhagadia,

Dist: Bharuch
04 Tender Fee Rs. 1500/- by Cash/D.D.

[Non refundable]
DD should be of nationalized Bank or
HDFC/IDBI/ICICI/AXIS Bank only in favour
of ‟GMDC Ltd‟, payable at Ahmadabad
05 Availability of tender On web site https://gmdc.nprocure.com
06 Total Estimated Cost Rs. 27,58,000/-
07 Earnest Money deposit (1%) Rs. 27,580/- By D.D. of Nationalised or

of ‟GMDC Ltd‟, payable at Ahmadabad and
to be enclosed along with technical bid only,
failing which tender will not be considered
as a valid tender
08 Security Deposit 5 % of contract value (including EMD) in

form of DD of nationalized bank or
of ‟GMDC Ltd‟, payable at Ahmedabad, to
be submitted on issue of LOI within 15 days
.
3
09 Retention Money Retention money deposit will be deducted
from RA bills @ 5 % of the value of the
contract amount, which will be released
within three months from completion of the
work.
10 Work Completion Time. 7 months
11 Date and time for On or before 17 -3-2011 up to 18.00 hrs

Downloading of Tender
document
12 Last date and time for On DT: 02-04-2011 up to 18.00 hrs
line submission of tender
13 Last date for Submission of Dt: 02-04-2011 up to 18.00 hrs.
Tender fee, EMD and
Supporting doc. for Tech. bid
during office hours in person
14 Date and time for opening of Dt: 04-04-2011 at 15.00 Hrs
Technical bid
15 Validity of tender 180 Days
1. The Gujarat Mineral Development Corporation reserves the right to reject any
or all the tenders or split the work between more than one bidders without
assigning any reason thereof.
2. The bidders are required to quote the rate strictly as per the terms and
conditions mentioned in the Tender document. The conditional tender will not
be entertained and shall be liable for outright rejection.
3. Bidder registered either in DGS & D, SSI, NSIC or in the Central/ State Govt.
or Central / State Govt. undertaking is not exempted by this corporation for
paying EMD, SD etc. As well as no price preferences over the quoted rate will
be considered.
4. Bidders are requested to visit the site before quoting the tender.
5. Tender will be considered only of those parties having Provident Fund

Number received from Regional Provident Fund Commissioner‟s office,
service tax number and permanent Account Number of Income Tax and
qualified as per Pre qualification criteria/bid.
4
6. Tender documents are only available in Electronic form. The bidder should
submit all the forms electronically only.
7. Bidders who wish to participate in this tender will have to register on

https://gmdc.nprocure.com. Further bidders who wish to participate in online
tenders will have to procure Digital Certificate as per information technology
Act 2000 using which they can sign their electronic bids. Bidder can procure
the same from (n) code solution- a division of GNFC Ltd, who are licensed
Certifying Authority by Govt. of India and they will assist them in procuring the
same at below mentioned address. Bidders who already have a valid Digital
certificate need not procure a new Digital Certificate.
(n) Code Solution

A division of GNFC
301, GNFC Infotower, Bodakdev,
Sarkhej- Gandhinagar highway,
Ahmedabad- 380 054
Tel: +91 26857316/17/18
Toll Free- 1-800-233-1-1 Ext: 501, 512, 516, 517
Fax: =91 79 26857321
E-mail: nprocure@gnvfc.net
Mobile: 9327084190, 98985889652
8. Contact details for officer at given below address :
General Manager (CSR)

GUJARAT MINERAL DEVELOPMENT CORPORATION LTD.
(A Govt. of Gujarat Enterprise)
KHANIJ BHAVAN, 132‟ RING ROAD, UNIVERSITY GROUND
VASTRAPUR, AHMEDABAD 380 052
 Tel No : 9727792625
 Phone : (079) 2791 2747
 Fax : (079) 2791 1454
5
INTRODUCTION
TENDER NO. 2/CSR/LR/2011
The owner, M/s. Gujarat Mineral Development Corporation Limited, Ahmedabad

(hereinafter referred to as Employer or Owner) invites e- tenders from experienced
and financially sound contractor, who are in the field of civil construction work, in two
bid system part I & II technical Bid/ PQ bid and Part II Price Bid, at Khanij Bhavan,
132 Ft Ring Road, Nr. University Ground, Vastrapur, Ahmedabad 380 052.
Name of Work : Construction of Box-culvert on Hankaran Nallah near Bhuri village

at Lignite Project, Rajpardi, Tal: Jhagadia, Dist: Bharuch. The estimated cost of
proposed work is approximately Rs. 27, 58,000/-
In view of the above and to get resourceful and experienced agencies (Contractors
or Bidders), it will be necessary to get them pre-qualified for the work under
reference on the basis of the documents submitted by the contractors as asked by
Gujarat Mineral Development Corporation Ltd ( GMDC Ltd)
With a view to select a competent agency for the subject work under reference the
Tender Documents are placed on (n) procure management system. The Tender
Documents include Technical Bid / Prequalification Bid. Only the tenders of the
tenderers who are qualified in the Technical Bid / Prequalification Bid will be
considered for further evaluation. The tenderers (bidders) are requested to send all
the required documents as mentioned in the Technical Bid / Prequalification Bid as
per e tender notice.
If required, inspection visit will be made by client for job of similar nature of the work
under reference.
Decision of the GMDC Management regarding prequalification based on the

documents furnished by the bidders contractors will be final and binding to all the
bidders and no correspondence will be entertained from any of the bidders in this
regard.
The Corporation reserves the right to reject any or all the Technical Bids for pre-
qualification without assigning any reasons there of.
The Corporation reserves the right to allot the work in parts to more than
6
One agency whose Technical Bid is qualified for the work.
All decision to award the work will be made by employer.
The Engineer in charge or any other Officer authorized by the Corporation is entitled
to ask the contractor to discontinue any work which does not meet the expected
and/or specified standards.
The selected tenderer will have to enter into an agreement with the Corporation on a
stamp paper of Rs.100/- to be provided by the selected tenderer in the form
approved by the Corporation covering all terms and conditions interalia that are
advertised and stated in this tender form and those which may be agreed upon or
modified by both parties during subsequent correspondence / discussions /
negotiations.
Dated Signature & Stamp of the Contractor
7
Chapter I
INSTRUCTIONS TO THE BIDDERS
Bidders are advised to read the instructions, evaluation norms and other terms and
conditions described in these documents under different Chapters carefully before
making their offer. In case of any doubt they may seek clarification from Manager
(Civil) available at the head office of the corporation at Ahmedabad.
THE TENDER & THE OFFER:

It is a two-bid system. The bid is required to be submitted on line at
https://nprocure.com by the date and time prescribed in the tender notice as
under:
Volume - I Technical Bid
- Technical bid documents are to be submitted on line. However, the

documents required to be submitted in support of experience, financial
position, status of the bidder, machinery and equipment owned by the
bidders etc. as well as tender fee and EMD in the desired form shall
be placed in sealed cover super-scribed “TECHNICAL BID, Tender
No., and Name of work”, should be submitted separately at Corporate
Office, Ahmedabad before stipulated time.
Volume - II Price-bid
- To be submitted on line before the stipulated time.
Opening of bids
a. e-tendering procedure is explained in detail in Chapter – II.
b. Preliminary bids will be opened after verification of receipt of payment

towards Tender document fee and EMD. The bidders may able to view
it on their computers.
c. On verification of the supporting documents, technical qualification of

the bidders will be assessed. However, all the bidders will be able view
the price bids online on their computers.
8
Corrigendum:
Sometimes issue of Corrigendum may be necessary to clarify doubts raised or to

make some corrections. All such corrigendum shall be displayed on web site
http://gmdc.nprocure.com only. The bidders are therefore advised to refer to this
web site from time to time to keep them updated.
9
CHAPTER- II
e- Tendering (Online Tendering) Instruction to Bidders
Further details of this tender are as under

1.0 Particulars: Tender No. 2/CSR/LR/2011
Construction of Box-culvert on Hankaran Nallah near Bhuri village at
Lignite Project, Rajpardi, Tal: Jhagadia, Dist: Bharuch
2.0 Down loading of Tender Documents
2.1 Bid document will be available on web site up to date shown below.
2.2 Bidders wishes to participate in this tender will have get them self
registered on web site https://nprocure.com
3.0 Digital Certificate
3.1 Bidders who wish to participate in on line tenders will have to procure /
should have legally valid digital Certificate as per Information Technology
act 2000 using which they can sign their electronic bids.
Bidders can procure the same from any of the license certifying Authority
of India or can contact (n) code solutions- a division of GNFC Ltd, who are
licensed certifying Authority by Govt. Of India
3.2 All bids should be digitally signed, for details regarding digital signature
certificate and related training involved the below mentioned address
should be contacted
(n) Code Solution
A division of GNFC
301, GNFC Infotower, Bodakdev,
Ahmedabad- 380 054
Tel: +91 26857316/17/18
Fax: =91 79 26857321
E-mail: nprocure@gnvfc.net
Mobile: 9327084190 , 98985889652
3.3 Bidders who already have a valid Digital certificate need not procure a
new digital certificate.
4.0 On line Submission of Technical & Price Bid
4.1 Bidders can prepare & edit their offers number of times before tender
submission date & time. After tender submission date & time, bidder can
not edit their offer submitted in any case. No written or online request in
this regard shall be granted.
4.2 Tenderer shall submit their offer, i.e. Technical bid as well as Price bid in
Electronic format on above mentioned website & date shown above after
Digitally signing the same.
4.3 Offers submitted without digitally signed will not be accepted
4.4 Offers in physical form will not be accepted in any case
10
5.0 Submission of Tender Fees and other Documents
5.1 Tender fee: Rs. 1500/-(Rupees One thousand five hundred only) by
Cash or DD in favour of ‟GMDC Ltd‟ payable at Ahmedabad from any
nationalized or HDFC/IDBI/ICICI/AXIS Bank Only. Demand Draft issued
after the last date and time of submission of bids will not be considered or
accepted.
5.2 Earnest money deposit: Rs. 27,580/- (Rs. Twenty Seven thousand Five
Hundred Eighty Only) by DD in favour of ‟GMDC Ltd‟ payable at
Ahmedabad from any nationalized or HDFC/IDBI/ICICI/AXIS Bank only.
Demand Draft issued after the last date of submission of bids will not be
considered as a valid or accepted in any case.
5.3 Other documents required to be submitted along with PQ criteria.
a. Bank solvency Rs. 4.00 lacs (not earlier than one year ) of
nationalized/IDBI/ICICI/HDFC/AXIS Bank only
b. Minimum three satisfactory work completion certificates of clients of
similar nature, out of one certificate having single value of work Rs. 15
lacs in single year during the last five years.
5.4 Bidder shall have to submit D D for Tender fee, EMD and other documents
as mentioned above in physical form so as to reach as per tender notice ,
during office hours to Manager(Civil), Civil Department, GMDC Limited
„Khanij Bhavan‟ , 132‟Ft ring road, Nr. University Ground, Vastrapur,
Ahmedabad- 380 052 in person only .
5.5 Bidder has to submit the document as said in 5.4 above and no other
condition in any form shall be considered at all, at the time of evaluation of
the tender, i.e. the bidder shall have to submit unconditional offer without
differing from any of the tender condition.
6.0 Opening of Tender
6.1 Opening of bid documents will be held on Date & time shown above in the
office of GMDC Ltd, Manager(Civil), Civil Department, at „Khanij Bhavan‟,
132‟Ft ring road, Nr. University Ground, Vastrapur, Ahmedabad- 380 052.
6.2 After successful completion of Technical Evaluation, price bid of only
those bidders would be opened online who are found to be substantially
responsive
7.0 Contacting Officer
7.1 Further details / clarification, if any required, will be available from
Manager(Civil), GMDC Ltd, Civil Department, at „Khanij Bhavan‟, 132‟Ft
ring road, Nr. University Ground, Vastrapur, Ahmedabad- 380 052
Ph no. 079- 2791 3200
7.2 In case bidder needs any clarification /assistance or if training required for
participating in online tender, they can contact at following office
(n) Code Solution
A division of GNFC
301, GNFC Infotower, Bodakdev, Ahmedabad- 380 054
Tel: +91 26857316/17/18, Fax: =91 79 26857321
E-mail: nprocure@gnvfc.net Mobile: 9327084190, 98985889652
11
8.0 General Instructions:
8.1 The fees for on line tender document will not be refunded under any
circumstances
8.2 EMD in the form specified in tender document only shall be accepted.
8.3 Tenders without Tender document fees, earnest money deposit (EMD) and
which do not fulfils all or any of the condition or submitted in complete in
any respect will be rejected.
8.4 Tenderer approved either by the Central/ State Govt. or Central / State
Govt. undertaking is not exempted by this corporation for paying EMD, SD
etc.
8.5 Conditional tender shall not be accepted.
8.6 This tender notice shall form a part of tender document
8.7 Tenderers are advised to read carefully the “Instruction for Tenderer” and
“eligibility criteria” contained in the tender documents
8.8 The Internet site address for E-Tender is www.nprocure.com
8.9 Free training camp for bidders will be organized on every Saturday
between 1.0 to 5.00 p.m. at (n) code solution, A division of GNFC, 301,
GNFC Infotower, Bodakdev, Ahmedabad – 380 054 . Bidders are
requested to take the benefit of the same.
8.10 The Corporation reserves the right to reject any or all the tenders or split
the work between more than one bidders without assigning any reason
thereof.
8.11 Tenderer is requested to quote rates as per the terms and conditions
mentioned in the Tender Document Part I and Part II. Tender submitted for
part items will not be considered and will be rejected.
8.12 Tenderer has to do this work strictly according to the drawings and
specifications provided by GMDC and which together with general
conditions, technical specifications, bills of quantities and contract
agreement, will be called “ Documents of Contract”
8.13 The selected Tenderer shall enter in to an agreement with the
corporation, on a stamp paper of Rs. 100/- which will be provided by the
selected Tenderer, in the form approved by the corporation covering all
terms and conditions .
12
Check List Of Documents Enclosed With Tender
Sr. No. Particulars Declaration (Strike

out whichever is not
applicable)
1. Check list of documents in the prescribed Performa, Yes / No
2. Earnest Money deposit paid for the value as indicated Yes / No
in Notice Inviting Tender,
3. Formats enclosed-dully filled in and signed along with all required enclosures,
complete as per Instruction to bidder
4 Documents /details as per Status of the Bidder, with Yes / No
documentary proof
13
CHAPTER - IV
Criteria for evaluation of Technical bid
Following details are requested to be furnished with documents to qualified in

Prequalification bid for the tendered work:
Status of the Bidder
FORM- A
Sr no Item Details
01 Name and address of Company.
02 Phone no
Mobile No
Fax No
E mail ID, Website
03 Name Of Concern Person
04 Whether Proprietorship
/partnership/ Pvt ltd / Limited co or
any other
05 Documentary Evidence for
Sr no 4 to be attached.
06 Technical qualification and
experience of the proprietor or
partners and leading technical
employees of the firm with detailed
Biodata.
07 List of persons involved in providing
comprehensive services with their
qualification experience and
designation (mentioned detail as
per format attached on pg.no. 16 of
technical bid-I
08 Number of years of experience in
construction field.
09 Income tax PAN Registration No
Copy [Copy to be enclosed]
10 Registration Certificate as per Yes/ No
statutory requirement under
contract labour laws (If you have for
the work executed of any type
issued by Authority submitted)
11 Whether enlisted as approved Yes/ No
Contractor with GOG / Public Under
taking /SEB / others if so please
furnish details and copy of
certificate in separate sheet.
14
12 Tax No. details.
VAT [State Sales Tax] No
Central Sales Tax C.S.T No
Service Tax No.
13 Provident Fund Registration Number Yes/ No

– Copy attached
14 Indicated details of Arbitrations/legal
proceeding in last ten years.
15 Penalty Clause - Accepted Yes/No
16 Prices/Charges- Accepted Yes/No

Prices / charges should be firm and
fixed till the completion of work.
Quoted price included all man power,
required material, safety measures,
PF contribution, all taxes, service tax,
VAT etc.
No price increase will be allowed
during tenure of contract due to any
reason.
17 Payment Terms – Accepted Yes/No
18 I. T. and other taxes Deduction.- Yes/No

Agree
Taxes will be deducted as per
prevailing Government rules from
the monthly bill
19 Validity of offer –Accepted Yes/ No
20 Work completion period as per price Yes/ No
schedule- accepted
21 Deviation sheet attached Yes/ No
Deviation sheet to be attached by the

bidder mentioning any deviation in
technical & commercial. If there is no
deviation then with, No deviation
sheet, submitted on letter head of the
bidders
22 Declaration sheet - Attached
Declaration I & II in prescribed

format on letter head of the bidder
15
23 List of persons involved in providing comprehensive services with their qualification
experience and designation
Head Office Staff (Technical) , Site Staff (Technical Site Staff & Non Technical)
Nos. Designation of Qualification Total Working in Remark
Employee in Experience Organization
Organization (in years)
16
FORM- B
Sr no Item Details
01 Latest copy of [ not later than one
year)
solvency certificate for amount not
less than Rs. 4.00 lacs of any
Nationalised or
IDBI/ICICI/HDFC/AXIS Bank only .
Name of Bankers
Full Address:
Phone Nos.
Fax No.
02 Turnover during last three Year Turnover Profit after
years certified by charted In Rs. Tax in Rs
Accountant
Bidder should have minimum 2009-10
annual turnover of Rs. 15 lac for 2008-09
any one year of last three years. 2007-08
03 Registration Certificate Copy with Yes/No
minimum „„D” class in Box Culvert
Category in the state of Gujarat or
equivalent class in other state or
CPWD (Copy attached)
04 Name of the company for whom Minimum three satisfactory work completion
work carried out during last five certificates of clients, out of one certificate
years with copy of orders and having single value of work Rs. 15 lacs in
satisfactory job completion single year during the last five years of
certificates. similar nature of work. .
Sr no Name Of Client /Nature of work Work Order No Date of Value. In
commence Rs.
ment and
date of
completion
17
05 Details of Equipment /Machinery related to above work, available with your firm or
at your work site mentioned and certified on your letter head.
1. Concrete mixer
2. Vibrator
3. Cube moulds
4. Levels
5. Centering and shuttering

materials
6 Other machineries &
equipment required for the work
of Tremix flooring and road work
All above information submitted are true the best of our knowledge
Note:
1) Decision of the Management regarding the technical qualification is final and

binding to the tenderer and no correspondence will be entertained in this
regards there after.
2) It is desirable to furnish all information with necessary documents.
18
CHAPTER - VI
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO THE BIDDERS.
1. Any conditional Tender will not be entertained and will be rejected.
2. Bidders are advised to visit the site to study the actual working conditions,
before submitting its offer.
3. Successful Tenderer is required to insure the whole work and their personnel
under Workman Compensation Act against any accident, minor and major
injuries arising out of the work situation. GMDC will not pay any charges
against the same.
4. The successful Tenderer shall have to start the work within period of 15 days
from the date of receipt of the Letter of Intent. In case of non-compliance with
the above condition, the contract may be terminated and deposit may be
forfeited.
5. The contract shall be item rate contract. The rate quoted is inclusive of all
labour and material required for completion of the Job.
6. Tenderers are expected to quote competitive and workable rates.
7. The Scope of work under this Tender is “providing and laying /fixing the
materials”. In the event of missing of above phrase in the description of
schedule of quantities will not mean that materials will be supplied by GMDC
and Tenderer has to deploy only laborers for completing the work.
8. Quantity mentioned in schedule of quantities against each item is only for

guidance to quote the rate and no claim will be entertained on either increase
or decrease in the quantity.
9. For the construction work, water and Electricity are in scope of bidders and you
have to make your own arrangement for water and electricity for construction
work. However, if possible, water and Electricity will be supplied by GMDC at
one point than charges will be recovered at the rate of 1 % and 0.5 % of cost of
bill amount.
19
10. No escalation in price / rate will be allowed on any ground. Even if there is a
delay in completion of the work due to client, then extension in time limit may
be granted with an explicit understanding that no price escalation will be paid.
However, GMDC has right to deduct the penalty. In any case no claim is
entitled for idle machinery and man power.
11. No extra item/ Additional work would be executed without getting approval from
HO. If there may be any extra work, contractors have to brought to the notice to
GMDC well in advance with expected cost of execution.
12. In absence of detailed specifications, the work should be carried out based on
either relevant IS code and /or fair engineering practice.
13. No mobilization advance shall be given by GMDC for this contract.
14. All the rates quoted by the Tenderer must be inclusive of all taxes and
duties applicable like, Royalty, Octroi, transportation, labour, sales tax,
Service Tax, VAT, Professional Tax, turn over tax, loading, unloading at
site, tools and tackles machineries, equipments etc .
15. Successful Tenderer will have to submit three copies of detailed bar chart in
the manner as per the Performa issued by the client, for timely completion of
the work
16. Tenderer is required to submit a copy of PF registration number received from

RPFC office along with the tender, failing which the tenderer will be rejected
summarily.
RA bill must be submitted along with the names of the laborers employed for
the work, salaries / payment made to them, PF code No., amount of P.F.
deducted from the salary made to the labours and employer‟s contribution
amount deposited in RPFC office till the previous month duly certified by
project office, failing which no payment will be made for the RA bill submitted
by the Contractor.
17. The Tenderer will have to submit „NO DEMAND CERTIFICATE‟ along with the
final bill of the work, as per the Performa given.
18. Successful Tenderer is supposed to enter in to an agreement with the

corporation on an appropriate stamp paper (to be provided by the contractor)
after accepting the Letter of Intent.
19. The quoted rates should hold good for working as per drawings issued from
time to time.
20. In overall interest of project and for better co-ordination Engineers in charge
may ask the contractor to stop the work for time being for which no
compensation will be paid.
20
21. You will abide by the provision of labour laws , contract labour regulations and
Abolition act (contract Act-37 of 1970) pertaining to the employment of the
labour and shall get your self register with regional provident fund
commissioner and infirm the corporation about the registration number by
submitting the copy of the number allotted to you by RPFC . You have to
submit the copy of labour license from the competent authority for the subject
work.
22. You shall be responsible for and shall pay any compensation to your workman
payable under the workman‟s compensation Act, 1923(VII of 1923) for injuries,
cause to the Workman. If such compensation is paid by GMDC as principal
under sub-section (1) of section 12 of the said act on behalf of the contractor. It
shall be recovered by GMDC from you under section (2) of the said section.
You shall pay such amount of compensation on demand, failing which same
will be recovered from your running bills.
23. Contractor has to submit month wise labour payment record duly certified by
labour welfare officer along with RA bill, failing which no payment will be made
for the respective RA bill.
24. The Roads, passages, approach, staircase at work site should be kept clean all
the time and it should be scope of the bidders.
25. The contractor has to produce bill of the materials use in the execution if ask
for by the client or consultant.
26. Bidders have to erect the Board, mentioning work details at work site at his
own cost.
21
CHAPTER VII
General Terms And Conditions Of Tender:
1) Prices:
Prices quoted by the tenderer should be firm and no price increase will be
allowed to the tenderer during the supply period.
2) Payment Terms and Running Bills:
Invoice/ Bill should be sent in duplicate. [Please mention our LOI/Work

Order no in the invoice without fail]. Original invoice, Measurement Sheet
Materials Test Certificates if any should be submitted to project with a
copy to head office for reference. The payment procedure will be carried
out on original copy only.
MODE OF PAYMENT OF RUNNING BILLS:
The contractor will submit running bill with required all documents for the
work executed for the minimum value of Rs. 7.0 lacs. Each running bill
shall be accompanied with detailed measurement sheets duly certified by
the Engineer In charge or authorized person of GMDC and Consultant. In
exception cases bill value below specified may be proceed.
An advance payment of RA bill will be paid at 75% of the amount payable

after applicable recovery under this contract by the Engineer In charge/
General Manager [Proj] at the project office.
Balance 25 % amount of Running Bills become payable at project after

deduction as per following and after approval from HO within 30 working
days from the date of receipt of the bill at HO.
A Payments shall be released for the work executed in all respects as per
BOQ, drawings and specifications.
B Retention money deposit will be deducted from RA bills @ 5 % of the

value of the bill amount.
C Income Tax as per the provisions of respective act from time to time.
D Security deposit at 5 % of the contract value exceed than tendered

value.
E Works contract tax / sales tax TDS, prevailing from time to time as per
rule shall be deducted from the running account bills.
22
F Cost of any services provided by GMDC and/or material supplied by
the GMDC.
G RA bill must be submitted along with the names of the employee

laborers employed for the work, salaries/payment made to them, PF
code No., amount of P.F. deducted from the salary made to the labours
and employer‟s contribution amount deposited in RPFC against each
and copy of challans for the amount deposited in RPFC office till the
previous month duly certified by project office, failing which no payment
will be made for the RA bill submitted by the Contractor.
H Other deduction either statutory or other work reason, if any.
3) Earnest Money Deposit.(EMD) / Security Deposit (SD) / Retention

Money
a) The tender must have to submit Earnest money deposit of Rs.

27,580/-only by demand Draft of Nationalised Bank OR
HDFC/ICICI/AXIS/IDBI Bank only in favour of Gujarat Mineral
Development Corporation Limited, payable at Ahmedabad. Cheque or
Bank Guarantee will not be accepted.
b) Earnest money deposit paid as above will be refunded to unsuccessful

tenderer only after finalizing of tender.
c) Successful tenderer has to pay full amount of Security Deposit @ 5%

of the contract value including EMD by Demand draft of Nationalised
Bank/IDBI/HDFC/AXIS/ICICI within 15 days from the date of issue of
order. Payment against the work as well as detail work order will be
issued only after submission of Security Deposit. If bidders fail to pay
security deposit within15 days from the date of order, order will be
deemed to be cancelled and EMD paid by you shall be forfeited.
d) Earnest Money Security deposit and Retention Money will not bear
any interest.
e) If successful tenderer does not pay security deposit and does not
commence work as per tender / LOI/ Work Order E.M.D. paid will be
liable to be forfeited by the corporation.
f) Security deposit paid by the successful tenderer shall be liable to be

forfeited by the corporation, if he does not able to carry out the work in
accordance with the terms and condition of the tender/ LOI/Purchase
Order/ Work Order. And abunded the work .This will not also prejudice
that Corporation will complete the work at your risk and cost.
23
g) Tender received without E.M.D. Will be outright rejected.
h) No relaxation on submission of EMD/SD for any small-scale industry

shall be considered.
i) Security deposit will be refunded within three months after the

completion of defect liability period of Twelve Months from the date
of completion of work, on demand by Contractor.
j) Retention money deposit will be deducted from RA bills @ 5 % of the

value of the contract amount, which will be released after three month
from completion of work.
4) Work Completion time Schedule.
Work Completion time is the essence of the contract and if Completion of

Work not made as stipulated or bidders abunded the work then
corporation shall be at liberty to execute the work at tenderer‟s risk and
cost and if thereby any extra expenditure is involved, the same shall be
debited to tenderer‟s account, If corporation is unable to execute and
complete the work from alternate source in time and if corporation suffers
any consequential loss, tenderer will have to bear the same. Corporation
in that case will forfeit the security deposit and will also have the right to
recover the claim against party for damage incurred.
5) Validity.
Validity of the tender should be for 180 days from the date of opening the
Price Bid and if required by the corporation, the tenderer will have to
extend the validity for a further period of 30 days.
6) Taxes / VAT/Service Tax.
Taxes should be stated as applicable and in scope of bidders. All the

rates quoted by the Tenderer must be inclusive of all taxes and duties
applicable like, Royalty, Octroi, transportation, labour, sales tax, Service
Tax, Professional Tax, turn over tax, loading, unloading at site
TDS: TDS will be deducted from bill amount as per the prevailing
Govt. Rules & regulations.
24
7) Work Completion time Penalty.
The work of Construction of Box-culvert on Hankaran Nallah near Bhuri

village at Lignite Project, Rajpardi, Tal: Jhagadia, Dist: Bharuch should be
completed within Seven months.
If work is not completed as per work completion time penalty will be levied
@ 0.1 % of contract value per day from the date of delaying the said work
up to the maximum 10 % of contract value. This will not absolve the
contractor from the responsibility of getting the balance work done by
client at his risk and cost through any other contractor.
8) Loss and Damages:
Any loss or damages or deterioration of the material in transits shall be at

the cost of the bidders. It shall be at the discretion of the corporation to
reject, damaged or spoiled material, if so noticed. During the work, if any
property of client damaged than book value/ repair cost + 20 % of same
should be recovered from bidder.
9) Insurance:
All insurance required for the subject work are in scope of bidders like third
party liability and Transits insurance of the consignment/ Insurance of
tenderer‟s manpower are to be provided by the tenderer at his cost.
10) Approval:
For the subject tendered work, GMDC decision for acceptance or rejection
of the Quality Of work will be final and binding on you.
11) Defect Liability Period. :
The work of construction of Box-culvert on Hankaran Nallah near Bhuri

village at Lignite Project, Rajpardi, Tal: Jhagadia, Dist: Bharuch should
have defect liability period of 12 Months from the date of completion
of work.
12) The corporation also reserves right to amend, alter, increase or decrease
the scope of work and payment will be made accordingly.
13) If tender submitted in contravention of the terms and conditions stated

herein will not be considered.
14) In case of any dispute or difference of opinion in the interpretation of any

of the terms and conditions of this tender, the decision of the Managing
Director of Corporation shall be final and binding to all.
25
15) The courts at Ahmedabad in Gujarat state only will have jurisdiction to deal
with and decide any legal dispute or contravention between the parties
hereto.
16) Statutory Obligations:-
I. That the “Bidder shall obtain licence under the Bombay Shops and
Establishment Act and it shall pay wages and benefits in accordance with the
applicable laws and shall not pay less than as notified by the Government
Authorities from time to time and shall maintain the employment records as
required under applicable laws.
II. That the Bidder shall get his own Licence under Contract Labour
(Regulation and Abolition) Act, it shall be binding to get the same renewed
from time to time and shall maintain all the records as per the act.
III. That the Bidder shall be responsible to enroll his employees, deduct,
add and deposit in the relevant accounts the contributions as required under
the Employees State Insurance Act, 1952 and the Employees Provident
Funds and Miscellaneous Provisions Act 1952 and any other enactment's
covered under the various applicable labour laws as well as maintain all
books of records for the staff and employees deputed by it for this contract
such as required under any laws applicable. The Bidder shall also furnish a
copy of such statements as documentary proof to the GMDC.
IV. That if the Bidder is not covered under the Employees State Insurance
Act, 1952 then it shall be the duty of the Bidder to take appropriate insurance
cover under the Workmen Compensation Act and take Group Personal
Accident Policy for all the employees deputed at the premises of the “First
Part”.
V. The Bidder has to issue to the employee's Identity card with their
photos and shall also maintain relevant register.
VI. That the Bidder shall give leave/holiday to its workforce as per the
provisions of labour laws applicable.
VII. That the Bidder would comply with all applicable laws and maintain all
such necessary records as necessitated under such enactment's.
VII. In case were the contract period is over or the contract is terminated
by either party the “Second Part” shall employ the personnel deployed by it at
other place. In case the workmen recruited by the GMDC is not provided
work at any other place and are discharged then all the eligible workmen shall
be paid retrenchment compensation, gratuity, bonus, earned leave and other
benefits payable under the labour laws.
26
On Tenderer’s Letter Head
From: Ref:
Date:
To
Managing Director
Gujarat Mineral Development Corporation Limited
[A Government Of Gujarat Enterprise]
„Khanij Bhavan,
Nr. University Ground, 132 Ft. Ring Road
Vastrapur
Ahmedabad 380 052
Sub: Earnest Money Deposit against TENDER No. 2/CSR/LR/2011
Dear Sir,
With reference to above and as per terms and conditions of tender we are sending
Herewith D.D. / Pay Order NO ___________________ Dated ______________Of

____________________________________________ [Name of Bank and Branch]
Payable at Ahmedabad for Rs. 27,580/- being the amount of E.M.D.
Kindly acknowledge the stamp receipt.
Thanking You
Yours Faithfully
[Name and Signature]
27
On Tenderer’s Letter Head
D E C L A R A T I O N –I
From: Ref:
Date:
To
Managing Director
[A Government of Gujarat Enterprise]
„Khanij Bhavan‟,
Vastrapur
Ahmedabad 380 052
Sub: Declaration.
Ref: TENDER No. 2/CSR/LR/2011
The work of construction of Box-culvert on Hankaran Nallah near Bhuri village
at Lignite Project, Rajpardi, Tal: Jhagadia, Dist: Bharuch
Dear Sir,
I / We have carefully gone through and clearly understood the tender notice tender
terms and conditions and tendered to execute and satisfactorily complete the whole
work strictly in accordance with the said Tender.
I/We hereby solemnly declare that none of Our Partners Jointly or Severally or Our
Firm / Company / Associates company have not been Black Listed by the Central
Government or any State Government or It‟s Undertaking.
I/We hereby further declare that, if the above Declaration is found untrue, G.M.D.C.
Ltd. shall be entitled to take any action against us severally and or individually or our
firm / Company, In this regard in any manner that may deemed fit by G.M.D.C.
Thanking You
Yours Faithfully
[Name and Signature & Stamp]
28
On Tenderer‟s Letter Head
DECLARATION II
FROM: Date:
To,
Managing Director
Vastrapur, Ahmedabad 380 052
SUB: Ref: TENDER No. 2/CSR/LR/2011

Dear Sir,
I/we having carefully gone through and clearly understood the preface, Tender
notice, details to be furnished along with technical bid, plans, specifications and
conditions of contract for the above mentioned work, do hereby Tender to execute
and complete the whole work strictly in accordance with the said plans and
specifications and conditions of contract at the rates set out in the priced schedule
and quantities attached hereto.
I/we agree to finish the whole work as per instructions within Seven months from
expiry of fifteen days from the date of issue of Letter Of Intent or actual
commencement of the work whichever is earlier.
I/We have deposited as EMD Rs. 27,580/-- by D.D. along with the technical bid in
your office which amount is not to bear any interest and my/our do hereby agree that
this sum shall be liable to be forfeited by the corporation at its sole discretion, in the
event of your accepting my /our Tender and my/our failing to execute the contract
when called upon to do so.
It is understood by me /us that the lowest or any Tender will not necessarily be
accepted and that no reason shall be given for such non acceptance
I/We agree to keep our offer valid for 180 days or for a further period as would be
desired by the corporation, from the date of the opening of the Price bid. We agree to
all the terms and conditions of the technical bid.
Thanking You
Yours Faithfully
[Name and Signature & Stamp]
29
On Tenderer‟s Letter Head
NO DEMAND CERTIFICATE FORMAT

Ref: Date:
From:
To
Managing Director
Vastrapur
Ahmedabad 380 052
Name of Work: TENDER No. 2/CSR/LR/2011

Dear Sir,
We_______________________________________ hereby certify that we have

received the payment of all our bills in full and final settlement of our claims in
respect of Tender No. 2/CSR/LR/2011 for The work of construction of Box-culvert
on Hankaran Nallah near Bhuri village at Lignite Project, Rajpardi, Tal: Jhagadia,
Dist: Bharuch
The payment received by us is in full and final settlement of our all the claims
towards the amount with respect to the work under reference.
Hence, we do not have any outstanding claim against GMDC for the work under
reference. We shall not claim any further amount from GMDC in future, either one
way or the other.
This certificate is given without any prejudice and in the presence of two witnesses.
Signature & Address of

Witnesses
_______________________
(1) _______________
Signature & Stamp of the Firm (2)_______________
30
SCHEDULE OF DEVIATIONS
TENDER NO: 2/CSR/LR/2011
Bidders shall indicate / bring out all Commercial & Technical deviations, clause by,
clause in this Schedule, but any commercial deviation will not be accepted by
GMDC. If the Schedule is not submitted duly filled in, the bid will be considered as
incomplete. (In case of „NO DEVIATION‟ the Schedule be submitted mentioning „NO
DEVIATION‟). If nothing is mentioned than it will be considered that bidders have “no
deviation”
Commercial Deviations For:-
Sr. Clause No. Deviation Justification

No
Technical Deviations For:-
Sr Clause No Deviation Justification

No
The tenderer hereby certify that there is no technical &commercial deviation from the
purchaser‟s specification.
Name of firm: ------------------------

Signature of Bidder: -----------------------
Name of Bidder: ------------------------
Date: ------------------------
Seal of the Company
31
GENERAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATINS
1.0 General:
These specifications cover the items of work in structural and non-structural parts of
the works coming under purview of this document. All work shall be carried out in
confirmation with these specifications. In general, provisions of Indian Standard,
Indian Road Congress codes MORTH specifications, standard specification of
Gujarat Govt. other national standards shall be followed unless otherwise specified.
These specifications are not intended to cover the minor details. The work shall be
executed in accordance with best modern practices & all latest codes and standards
referred to in these specifications and their revisions issued 30 days prior to
submission of tender shall be read in conjunction with the various other documents
forming the contract viz. tender specifications, Schedule B, contractor drawings and
other related documents.
ORDER OF PRECENDENCE
For this document, in case of errors, omissions and/or disagreement between written
and scaled dimensions on the drawings or between the drawings and specifications
etc. the following order of precedence shall apply:
a) Between scaled dimensions and written dimensions / description on a

drawing the later shall be accepted.
b) Between the written or shown description/or dimensions in the drawing, and
the corresponding one in the specification, the later shall apply.
c) For execution stage the following order of precedence shall apply.
i) Execution drawings/notes/mastication specifically approved for

construction.
ii) Specific provisions of specifications and conditions of this contract
document.
iii) In the absence of above, standard specifications of PWD and good
engineering practices in that order.
iv) In case of conflicting provisions of IS specifications and IRC
specifications, former shall prevail, i.e. IS specifications would have
precedence over IRC specifications unless tender provisions are
specific for the particular item of work.
v) However, notwithstanding anything said above, the interpretation/
decision of the Engineer-in- charge shall be final and binding.
1. Inclusive documents:
The provisions of all conditions of contract, those specified in this tender as

well as execution drawings, and notes or other specifications issued in writing
by the Engineer in charge shall form part of these specifications.
2 Order of precedence, clarifications and interpretations:
When the various specifications and codes referred to in preceding portion

are at variance with these specifications and or with each other, the order of
precedence with generally be as under
32
The attention of the contractor is drawn to those clauses of IS Codes which
require either supplementing specifications from the Engineer in charge or the
call for mutual agreement of such specifications between the supplier and
purchaser. In such cases, it shall be responsibility of the contractor to seek
clarifications on any uncertainty, ambiguity and obtain previous approval of
the Engineer in charge, before taking up supply/construction etc.
3 Measurement and Payments:
(a) The methods of measurement and payment shall be as described

under various items and in the schedule - B Where specific
definitions are not given, the methods described in IS Code will be
followed. Should there be any detail of construction of materials
which has not been referred to in the specifications or in the
Schedule - B and drawings but the necessity for which may be
implied or inferred there from, or which are usual or essential for the
completion of the work in the trades, the same shall be deemed to be
included in the rates quoted by the contractor in the schedule-B.
(b) Unacceptable work
All defective works are liable to be demolished, rebuilt and defective

materials replaced by the contractor at his own cost. In the event of
such works being accepted by carrying out repairs etc. as specified
by the Engineer in charge, the cost of repairs will be borne by the
contractor and will be paid for the works actually carried out by him at
reduced rates of the tendered rates, as may be considered
reasonable by the Engineer in charge, in the preparation of final or on
account bills.
2.0 SPECIFICATIONS FOR EARTH WORK EXCAVATION AND BACK FILLING
1. Scope:
This part of the specifications deals with general requirements for earthwork
in excavation in different materials, site grading, filling in areas shown in
drawings, back filling around foundations, plinths and approach ramps,
conveyance and disposal of excess excavated soil or stacking them properly
as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge and all operations covered within the
intent and purpose of these specifications.
2 Applicable Codes:
The provisions of the latest Indian Standards listed below in addition to those
mentioned in tender document, but not restricted to, shall form part of these
specifications:
IS: 1200 : Method of measurement of building and civil engineering works

Part 1: Earth work
IS: 1498: Classification and identification of soil for general Engineering

purposes.
IS:2720 : Method of test for soils (All Parts)
IS:2809 : Glossary of terms and symbols relating to soil engineering
33
IS:3764 : Safety code for excavation work
IS:4988 : Glossary of terms and classifications of earth moving Machinery
(All Parts)
3. Drawings:
The Engineer-in-charge will furnish wherever in his opinion such drawings are
required to show the areas to be excavated/filled, sequence of priorities etc.
The contractor shall follow such drawings strictly.
4. Classification of earth:
For purpose of earth work soil shall be classified as under
Loose/soft soil: Any soil which generally yields to the application of picks
and shovels, phawras, rakes or any such ordinary excavating implements or
organic soil, gravel, silt, sand turf, loam, clay, peat etc. fall under this
category.
Dense/Hard Soil: Any soil which generally, requires the close application of
picks, or jumpers or scarifies to loosen it. Stiff clay, gravel and cobble stone
etc. fall under this category.
(Note: Cobble stone is the rock fragment usually rounded or semi-rounded

having maximum diameter in any one direction between 80 & 300 mm)
Mud: Mud is mixture of ordinary soft soil and water in fluid or weak solid state.
Soft/Disintegrated rock: (Not requiring blasting). This shall include the type of
rock and boulders which may be quarried or split with crow-bars. Laterite and
hard conglomerates also come under this category.
Hard Rock: (Requiring blasting). This shall include the type of rock or boulder
which for quarrying or splitting requires the use of mechanical plant or
blasting. (Note: Boulders is a rock fragment usually rounded by weathering,
disintegration or abrasion by water or ice having a maximum dimension in any
direction of more than 300 mm.
Hard Rock: (Requiring blasting but where blasting is prohibited) Under this
category shall fall hard rocks which though normally requires blasting for their
removal but blasting is prohibited and excavation has to be done by chiseling,
wedging or other suitable method.
5 General:
5.1.1 The contractors shall furnish all tools, plant, instruments qualified supervisory
staff, labour, materials, any temporary works, consumables and everything
necessary, whether or not such items are specifically stated herein, for
completion of the job in accordance with the requirements of specifications.
5.1.2 The contractor shall carry out the survey of the site before excavation and set
out properly all utility and service lines and establish levels for various works
such as earthwork in excavation for grading, foundations, plinth filling, drains,
cable trenches, water pipelines, culverts, retaining walls etc. These will be
checked by the Engineer-in-charge or his representative and thereafter
34
recorded plan duly signed by the contractor shall be famished to the Engineer
in charge for his approval before starting actual foundation excavations.
5.1.3 The excavation shall be done to correct lines and levels. This shall include
where required, proper strutting & strong shoring to maintain excavation and
impart safety against collapse of soil, and erection and maintenance of sand
barricades around excavations with warning signs displayed during night for
safety purposes. The warning signs shall be with reflectors type paints.
5.1.4 The rates quoted shall include for stacking of excavated material in regular
heaps, bunds, rip rap with regular slopes as directed by the Engineer-in-
charge within all leads and leveling the same so as to provide natural
drainage. Soil excavation shall be properly stacked as directed by the
Engineer-in-charge. As a rule all softer materials shall be laid along the centre
of the heaps, the harder and more resistant materials, forming the casing on
the sides and the top.
6 Clearing:
The area to be excavated/filled shall be cleared of all fences, trees, tree

guard, M.S. grill above road divider and filled up earth in between road
divider, plan logs, stumps, bush, vegetation, rubbish, slush, road, pavement
structure if any required etc. and other objectionable matter. If any roots or
stumps of trees are met during excavation, they shall be removed. The
material so removed shall be disposed off as directed by the Engineer-in-
charge. Where earth fill is intended, the area shall be cleared of all loose or
soft patches, top soil containing objectionable matter/materials before filling
commences. No separate payment shall be made for such clearing works.
7 Precious objects, Relics, Objects of Antics etc.
All gold, silver, oil, minerals, archeological and other findings of importance or
other materials of any description and all previous stones, coins, treasure
traces, relics, antiquities, and similar things which may be found in or upon
the site shall be the property of the corporation and the contractor shall dully
preserve the same to the satisfaction of the Engineer in charge and from time
to time, deliver the same to him.
8 Excavation for Structures:
8.1 Description:
Excavation for structures shall consist of removal of materials for the

construction of the foundations of approach structures retaining walls, head
walls, and other similar structures in accordance with the requirements of this
specification on the lines and dimensions shown on the drawings or as
directed by the Engineer-in-charge. The work shall include all necessary
sheathing, strutting, shoring, bracing, draining, pumping; proper supporting
underground service lines like gas, water pipe, drainage line, electric cables,
telephone cables as directed by Engineer-in-charge, and the removal of all
logs, stumps, shrubs and other deleterious matter and obstructions etc.
necessary for placing the foundations, trimming bottoms of excavation,
backfilling, clearing up the site and disposal of all surplus materials.
35
8.2 Setting out:
After the site has been cleared, the limits of excavation for foundations shall
be set out true to lines and sections as shown oft the drawing or as directed
by the Engineer-in-charge. The contractor shall provide all labour, survey
instruments and materials such as string, pegs, nails, bamboos, stones, lime
mortar, concrete etc., required in connection with the setting out. He shall be
responsible for the maintenance of bench marks and other marks and stakes
as long as they are required for the work in the opinion of the Engineer-in-
charge.
8.3 Excavation:
Excavation shall be taken to the width of the lowest step of footing or the pile
caps and the sides shall be left plumb where the nature of the soil allows it.
Where the nature of the soil or the depth of excavated trench/pit does not
permit vertical sides, the contractor at his own expense shall put up
necessary shoring, emitting and planking or cut slopes to a safe angle or both
with due regard to the safety of personnel including labourers etc. and the
works and to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-charge. Non-compliance of
these requirements would tantamount to negligence on the part of the
contractor.
8.4 Dewatering and Protection:
All foundations shall be laid in dry condition. Where water is met with in
excavation due to seepage, rain or other reasons, the contractor shall take
adequate measures such as bailing, pumping, construction of diversion
channels, drainage channels, bunds and any other necessary works to keep
the foundation trenches/pits dry to lay foundation and to keep the green
concrete/all foundations shall laid in dry protected against damage by or
undermine its strength including erosion. In this regard and other details
thereof, it shall be left to the choice of the contractor but subject to the
approval of the Engineer-m-charge. Approval of the Engineer-in-charge shall
however, not relieve the contractor of his responsibility for the adequacy of
dewatering and protection arrangements and the safety of the works.
Pumping from inside of any foundation enclosures shall be done in such a

manner as to preclude the possibility for the movement of water through any
freshly placed concrete No pumping shall be permitted during the placing of
concrete or for any period of at least 24 hours thereafter. Unless it is done
from a suitable sump separated from the concrete work by a water tight wall
or similar means.
At the discretion of the contractor and at his cost, cement grouting or other
approved methods may be used prevent or to reduce seepage and to protect
the excavation area. The contractor shall take all precautions in diverting
channels and in discharging the drained water so as not to cause damage to
the works or to adjoining property or hindrances to moving traffic on adjoining
roads.
36
8.5 Preparation of Foundation:
The bottom of the foundation shall be leveled both longitudinally and

transversely and stepped as directed by the Engineer-in-charge. Before the
footing is laid, the surface shall be slightly watered and rammed. In the event
of the excavation having been made deeper that than shown on the drawing
or as otherwise ordered by the Engineer-in-charge, the extra depth shall be
made up with concrete all foundation shall laid in dry of the foundation grade
at the cost of the contractor. Ordinary soil filling shall not be used for the
purpose to bring the foundation to level as per the design. When rock or other
hard strata is encountered it shall be freed of all loose and soft materials
cleaned and cut to a firm surface either level, stepped or serrated as directed
by the Engineer in charge.
If there are any slips or blows in the excavation these shall be removed by the
contractor at his own cost.
8.6 Backfilling:
To the extent available, selected surplus soils from the excavation shall be
used as backfill as may be directed by the Engineer in charge and after
obtaining his concurrence before actually taking any action in the re-use of
these excavated stuff from foundation. Fill material shall be free from clods of
earth shall be broken or removed. When the excavated material is mostly
rock, the boulders shall be broken into pieces not larger than 150 mm size
mixed with properly graded find materials consisting of murrum or earth to fill
up the voids and mixture used for filling.
If any selected fill material is required to be borrowed the contractor shall

make arrangement for bringing the material from outside borrow pits. The
material sources shall be subject to the prior approval of the Engineer in
charge. The contractor shall make necessary access roads to such borrow
areas at his own cost, if such access roads do not exist.
Backfilling of the foundation trenches/pits shall be done as soon as foundation

work has been completed to the satisfaction of Engineer in charge and
measured but not earlier than the full setting period of the concrete or
masonry work. Backfilling shall be carried out in such a manner as not to
cause undue thrust on any part of the structure. Annular space around
foundations shall be back filled with coarse sand after clearing it of all debris
and in layers of 150 mm. loose thickness, watered and compacted by
vibratory roller to the satisfaction of the Engineer in charge and up to the
original surface level. The remaining back filling shall be done in like manner
as aforesaid, using excavated earth if approved or by borrowed earth from
approved source.
8.7 Disposal of Surplus Excavation Materials:
The surplus excavated earth, after backfilling the trenches shall have to be
removed from the site as directed. However, surplus earth will be property of
contractor and contractor may dispose off or stock the same at their own risk.
No payment for the carting of surplus will be made separately.
37
After completion and consolidation, if any short fall of earth is found then
contractor has to bring the same to the required quantity of required quality in
order to meet short fall at his / their own cost. Moreover if any settlement of
road after reinstatement is observed during the defect liability period of work,
contractor shall be fully responsible for the defective work and patches /
depressions / settlements shall be repaired with quarry spoil or metal at
contractors own cost. If contractor fails to repair the patches / depressions /
settlements in time, corporation will repair it at all risk & cost of contractor.
Surplus earth shall not be disposed off in a way that leads to nuisance to the
public or GMDC,RAJPARDI.
9 Details of casting yard
Casting yard shall be located very nearby from flyover site. It is very essential
to have fencing and gate at the time of operation of casting yard. Entire area
round about 1400 sq. m. has to be developed with proper soling, filling of
graded material with satisfactory compaction and top layer finished with good
concrete. The area has to be divided in three parts (1) for casting and pre-
stressing (2) stack yard (3) for shifting and placement. It may be kept in mind
that during these activities, proper stack yard for dumping construction
materials, are to be arranged very nearby from casting yard. Necessary
precaution measures have to be regularized by deploying highly skilled
professionals at casting yard. Entire sequence of the work has to be
monitored by contractor and time to time review will be made by owner /
consultant. In this regard, it is imperative that total performance will depend
on planning, hence a detailed chalk out plan with all micro activities are to be
submitted to owner / consultant. Quality control will be as per IS / MORTH
specification and detailed test reports, etc. will be submitted by contractor to
owner / consultant. For making good quality precast element and casting
yard, entire responsibility will be of contractor. Expenditure on this account
is not payable as extra but all the details of expenditures have to be included
in item rates which are quoted by contractor.
10 Measurement and Rates:
The measurement shall be generally conforming to IS:2000 Part I, unless

otherwise specified. Measurement for excavation of foundation footings shall
be as required for the exact width, length and depth as shown or figured on
the drawings or as may be directed by the engineer in charge. If taken to a
greater width, length or depth than shown or required, the extra work
occasioned thereby shall be done at the contractor's expenses.
The dimensions of the trenches and pits shall be measured correct to the
nearest cm. and cubical contents worked out in cubic meters, correct to two
places of decimal. Measurements of filling excavated earth or sand in
foundations shall be measured for the purpose of payment in cubic meter.
The dimensions of the filling shall be measured correct to the nearest
centimeters and cubical contents worked out in cubic meters correct to two
places of decimal.
Rate for earth work shall include the following:
38
(a) Excavation and disposing surplus earth upto a lead of 500 m at place
as directed by the Engineer in charge.
(b) Setting out works', profiles etc.
(c) Site clearance such as cleaning of vegetation, shrubs, brushwood etc.
(d) Leaving "Deadmen" or "Tell Tales" and their removal after

measurement.
(e) Bailing/pumping out water in excavation from rains, sub soil water etc.
(f) Protection works, temporary supports for safety, by underpinning if

need be to existing services, i.e. drains, water mains, cables and other
utility services met within the course of excavation. Removal of
electricity and / or telephone cables, posts etc. as necessary, shall be
arranged by the Engineer in charge.
(g) Forming (or leaving) steps inside deep trenches and their removal:
(h) Removing slips or falls in excavation.
(i) Fencing and/or other suitable measures for protection against risk of
accidents, as approved by the Engineer in charge.
(j) Excavation for insertion of planking and strutting where, required.
(k) Backfilling the trenches by selected excavated material available at

site.
SAND FILLING:
Specification as per MORTH Specification section 1209.
Sand filling shall commenced after a period of 3 days of laying of bottom plug.
Sand shall be clean & free from earth, clay clod, roots, boulder, shingle, etc.
3.0 SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLAIN, REINFORCED AND PRESTRESSED CONCRETE:
1. GENERAL
These specifications cover the requirements of plain, reinforced and pre-stressed
concrete for use in various components of structures.
For all items of concrete in any portion of the structure or its associated works
controlled concrete shall be used unless otherwise specified. Normal / ordinary
concrete mix as shown on the drawing or as directed by the Engineer-in-charge may
be used.
The provisions of the latest revisions of the following I.S Codes shall form a part of
this specification to the extent they are relevant.
IS-226 Specification for structural steel (standard quality).
IS-269 Specification for ordinary and low heat Portland cement

39
IS-280 Specification for mild steel wire for general engineering purpose.
IS-303 Plywood for general purposes.
IS-383 Specification for coarse and fine aggregate.
IS-432 (All Parts) Specifications for mild steel and medium tensile steel
bars and hard-drawn steel wire for concrete reinforcement.
Part-I – Mild steel and medium tensile bars.
Part-II – Hard drawn steel wire.
IS-455 Specification for Portland blast furnace slag cement.
IS-456 Code of practice for plain and reinforced concrete (IS:456-2000)
IS-460 Specification for test sieves.
IS-516 Methods of test for strength of concrete.
IS-650 Standard sand for testing of cement.
IS-1139 Hot rolled mild steel, medium tensile steel and HYSD bars for
concrete reinforcement.
IS-1199 Sampling and analysis of concrete.
IS-1200 Method of measurement of building works.
IS-1343 Code of practice for pre-stressed concrete.
IS-1489 Specification for Portland pozzo-lana cement.
IS-1542 Sand for plaster.
IS-1566 Specification for hard-drawn steel wire fabric
IS-1732 Dimensions for round & square steel bars for structural & general
engineering purposes.
IS-1785 Plain hard drawn steel wire for pre-stressed concrete (Part-I) Cold
drawn stress-relieved wire.
IS-1786 Specification for high strength deformed steel bars & wires for
concrete reinforcement.
IS-1791 Batch type concrete mixers.
IS-2062 Specification for structural steel (fusion welding quality)
IS-2386 (All Parts) Method of test for aggregates for concrete.
IS-2502 Code of practice for bending and fixing of bars for concrete
reinforcement
40
IS-2505 Immersion type concrete vibrators.
IS-2506 Screed board concrete vibrators.
IS-2722 Specification for portable swing weighs batcher (single and double
bucket type).
IS-2751 Code of practice for welding of M.S. bars.
IS-2911 Code of practice for design and construction of pile foundation

(Part-I & IV).
IS-3366 Pan vibrators
IS-3370 (All Parts) Code of practice for concrete structure for the storage of
liquids.
IS-3558 Code of practice for the use of immersion vibrators for consolidating
concrete.
IS-4656 Form vibrators for concrete.
IS-5525 Recommendation for detailing of reinforcement in reinforced

concrete works.
IS-5640 Method of test for determining aggregate impact value of soft,

coarse aggregate.
IS-5816 Method of test for splitting tensile strength of concrete cylinder.
IS-6006 Uncoated stress relieved strand for pre-stressed concrete.
IS-6461 Cement concrete : glossary of terms.
IS-8041 Specifications for rapid hardening Portland cement.
IS-8043 Specifications for hydrophobic Portland cement.
IS-8112 Specifications for high strength ordinary Portland cement.
IS-9103 Admixtures for concrete.

1.1 OTHER CODES AND SPECIFICATIONS
Other IS codes pertaining to the items of cement concrete work in structural work not
listed above shall also be deemed to come under the purview of this clause. All
Indian Roads Congress Standards, specifications and codes of practice also some
under this purview.
41
2.0 GRADE OF CONCRETE
2.1 CONTROLLED CONCRETE
For controlled concrete, design of the mix shall be carried out for the respective
target strength and in its production all necessary precautions shall be taken to
ensure that the required works cube strength is attained and maintained.
The controlled concrete grades are designated as M 20, M 25, M 30, M 35, M 40, M
45 and M 50 and as per the technology used for such designation in IRC codes of
practice.
2.2 ORDINARY CONCRETE (Concrete Grades M:15 & below)
In case of ordinary / nominal grade concrete, mix is required to be arrived at by

preliminary tests, proportions of cement, fine aggregates and coarse aggregates are
specified by mass as given in Table 3
In the designation of a concrete mix, letter 'M‟ refers to the mix and the number to the
specified 28 days works cube compressive strength of that mix on 150 mm cubes,
expressed in N/mm2.
3.0 STRENGTH REQUIREMENT OF CONCRETE
Where Ordinary Portland Cement conforming to IS:269 or Portland Blast Furnace

Cement conforming to IS:456 is used, the compressive strength requirements for
various grades of concrete controlled as well as nominal shall be as given in Table 1.
Where rapid hardening Portland cement is used, the 28 days compressive strength
requirements shall be met at 7 days.
For controlled concrete, the mix shall be so designed for the so called Target
strength as to attain in preliminary tests strength at least 33 per cent higher than that
required on work tests, for concrete strength up to and including M-25 and 25%
higher for higher strengths.
Table 1
Grade of Concrete Compressive Works Test Strength in N/Sq. mm on

150 mm Cubes after Testing Conducted in
accordance with IS : 516
Min. at 7 days Min. at 28 days
M 10 7 10
M 15 10 15
M 20 13.5 20
M 25 17 25
M 30 20 30
M 35 23.5 35
Note: In all cases, the 28 days compressive strength specified in Table 1

shall alone be the criterion for acceptance or rejection of the concrete.
42
4.0 MATERIALS: As per schedule-A of Para 4.1 of General rules and directions.
4.1 CEMENT
Fresh quality cement shall be procured only from approved manufacturer / supplier
and shall be subject to prior approval of the Engineer-in-Charge. Following types of
cement shall be used :
i) All cement used for the work shall be ordinary Portland cement or such other
cement as may be permitted by the Engineer-in-charge. Portland cement
shall comply with the requirements of the latest issue of IS 8112 and other
relevant IS codes. High alumina cement, rapid hardening cement and
Portland Slag cement etc., can be used only when permitted by the Engineer-
in-charge. Such cements shall be in accordance with relevant IS Codes.
Portland Pozzo-lana cement when permitted by the Engineer-in-charge shall
conform to IS 1489 Part I but it shall not be used for RCC structural member.
ii) Cement which has remained in bulk storage at the mill for more than 6
months or which has remained in bags at the dealers storage for over 3
months, or which has been stored at project site for more than 3 months shall
be re-tested before use. Cement shall also be rejected if it fails to conform to
any of the requirements of these specifications.
iii) Different types of cement shall not be mixed.
4.2 FINE AGGREGATES
Fine aggregates shall consist of natural sand, manufactured sand or an approved

combination thereof and shall conform to IS : 838. The grading zone of sand
proposed for use shall be supplied by the contractor and got approved by the
Engineer-in-Charge.
The sand shall be siliceous material, sharp, hard, strong and durable and shall be
free from adherent coatings, clay, dust, alkali, organic material, deleterious matter,
lumps, etc.
Either natural or manufactured and shall be prepared for use by such screening or
washing, or both, as necessary, to remove all objectionable foreign matter. Natural
sand shall be washed, unless specific written authority is given by the Engineer-in-
charge to use sand that meets specifications and standards of cleanliness without
washing. The cost of screening and washing must be borne by the contractor. The
fine aggregate shall be taken from a source approved by the Engineer-in-charge.
4.3 COARSE AGGREGATES
Coarse aggregates shall consist of hard, strong, durable particles of crushed stone
and shall be free thin elongated soft pieces, organic or other deleterious matter. It will
be from a source approved by the Engine charge. Coarse aggregate shall conform to
IS: 383.
Coarse aggregate shall be washed if necessary to remove all vegetable and other
perishable substances and objectionable amounts of other foreign matter, the cost of
washing and screening being borne by the contractor.
43
Size of Coarse Aggregates
Following shall be the maximum nominal size of coarse aggregate for the different
items of work if not specified in the item of works or their respective specifications:
Sr. Item of Construction Max. Nominal Size of

No. Coarse Aggregate
(i) RCC well staining concrete, RCC well curb & 40 mm

RCC piles in plum concrete
(ii) Well cap or pile cap, solid type piers, abutments 25 /20 mm
and wing walls, and pier caps, footing of open
foundation and general items of work in bridge
and building construction.
(iii) RCC works in girders, deck slab, wearing coat, 25 /20 mm
kerbs, light posts, ballast walls, approach slab etc.
and piers, abutments, returns, wing walls and
retaining walls.
(iv) RCC bearings, shells and other thin walled 25 /20 mm
members and in zones of congestion.
(v) For any other item of construction not covered by As specified in the
items (i) to (iv) drawings or as desired
by the Engineer-in-
Charge in case it is not
specified on the
drawing.
For heavily reinforced concrete members as in the case of ribs of main beams, the
nominal maximum size of aggregate shall usually be restricted to 5 mm less than the
minimum lateral clear distance between the main bars, or 5 mm less than the
minimum cover to the reinforcement, whichever is smaller.
4.4 REINFORCING STEEL (Refer Clause 302.5 of IRC:21)
Reinforcing steel shall be clean and free from loose mill scales, dust, loose rust and
coats of paints, oil, grease or other coatings which may impair or reduce bond.
a) Fe 240 - Mild steel shall conform to the latest edition of IS: 432 Part 1.
b) Fe 415 &Fe-500 high strength deformed bars shall conform to IS: 1786, TMT
bars conforming to IS: 1786 shall only be used.
c) Structural steel sections and plates shall conform IS : 226 and IS : 2062.
PERMISSIBLE LIMIT FOR SOLIDS

Tested as per Permissible limit max.
Organic IS : 3025 (Pt.18) 200 mg/lit.
Inorganic IS : 3025 (Pt. 18) 3000 mg/lit.

Sulphates IS : 3025 (Pt. 28) 400 mg./lit.
(as SO3)
Chlorides IS : 3025 (Pt. 32) 2000 mg. lit. for concrete work not containing
(as C1) embedded steel and 500 mg./lit. for prestressed
/reinforced concrete work.
44
Suspended IS : 3025 (Pt. 7) 2000 mg./lit.
matter
4.5 WATER
Water used mixing and curing shall be free from injurious amounts of deleterious
material. pH value of water shall not be less than 6. Potable water are generally
considered satisfactory for mixing and curing concrete. Water shall be got tested before
use in concrete and curing. The cost for the same shall be borne by the contractor.
Permissible limits for solid shall be as below :
PERMISSIBLE LIMIT FOR SOLIDS

Tested as per Permissible limit max.
Organic IS:3025 (Pt.18) 200 mg/lit.
Inorganic IS:3025 (Pt.18) 3000 mg/lit.
Sulphates (as SO3) IS:3025 (Pt.28) 400 mg/lit.
Chlorides (as C1) IS:3025 (Pt.32) 2000 mg/lit.
for concrete work not
containing
4.6 ADMIXTURES
No materials other than essential ingredients i.e., cement, aggregate and water, shall
ordinarily by used in the manufacture of concrete or mortar. But the Engineer-in-Charge
may permit the use of approved admixtures for improving the workability of the
concrete, if so specified on satisfactory evidence that its use does not in any way
adversely affect the properties of concrete particularly its strength, volume changes,
durability and has no deleterious effect on the reinforcement. Admixture where allowed
shall conform to relevant IS: 9103.
Chloride content in admixture shall be independently tested for each batch before
acceptance.
4.7 MATERIALS FOR REPAIR WORK
The use of epoxy for bonding fresh concrete used for repairs will be permitted on
written approval of the Engineer-in-Charge. Epoxies shall be applied in accordance
with the instructions of the Manufacture. The cost of such repair when approved by
the Engineer-in-Charge shall be borne by the contractor
4.8 STORAGE OF MATERIALS
i) Cement
The contractor shall make arrangements to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in- Charge
for the storage of cement to prevent deterioration due to moisture and/or intrusion of
foreign matter. Bulk cement shall be stored in approved water-proof bin or silo. Bagged
cement shall be stored in a suitable weather tight warehouse in a manner to provide
easy access for identification and inspection of each consignment. Stored cement shall
meet the test requirements as per IS-269 at any time after storage, when a retest is
ordered by the Engineer-in-Charge. Each consignment shall be stacked separately
with the date of receipt flagged on it, not more than 12 bags being stacked in height,
the bags being arranged with headers and stretchers. Normally consignments shall be
used in the order of receipt at site unless otherwise directed. In the case of large
concrete pours the Engineer-in- Charge will decide on the batch of cement to be used
45
taking into consideration the quantity of cement with particular reference to the
concerned concrete pours. Any additional work in handling and storage of cement
contingent upon this requirement shall be to the contractors' account and no extra
claim will be entertained. Cement shall be protected from closure to moisture in transit,
in storage at the works and until it enters the concrete mixers. The contractor shall
keep accurate records of the deliveries of the cement and of its use in the work.
ii) Aggregates
Coarse and fine aggregates shall be stacked separately in such manner as to prevent
contamination by foreign materials. All aggregates shall be stored on concrete or
masonry platforms, each size shall be kept separate with wooden, steel, concrete, or
masonry bulk heads, or shall be stored in separate stacks, taking care to prevent the
materials at the edges of the stock piles from getting intermixed. Stacks of fine and
coarse aggregates shall be kept sufficiently apart. The aggregates shall be stored in
easily measurable stacks of suitable heights as may be directed by the Engineer- in-
Charge.
iii) Reinforcing Steel
Reinforcing steel shall not be stored directly on the ground. These shall be stored
under cover and shall be protected from rusting, oil, grease and distortions as directed
by the Engineer-in-Charge.
5.0 PROPORTIONING CONCRETE
5.1 CONTROLLED CONCRETE
Concrete mix shall be designed for 33% higher strength than the grade of concrete
specified.. The proportions for ingredients chosen shall be such that concrete has
adequate workability for conditions prevailing on the work in question and can be
properly compacted with the means available.
Except where it can be shown to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge that a

supply of properly graded aggregate of uniform quality can be maintained till the
completion of work, grading of aggregate should be strictly controlled. The different
sizes, shall be stocked in separate stock piles. Required quantity of material shall be
stock-piled several hours, preferably a day, before use. Grading of coarse and fine
aggregate shall be checked as frequently as possible, frequency for a given job being
determined by the Engineer-in-charge to ensure that the suppliers are maintaining
the uniform grading as approved for samples used in the design mix.
The quantity of both cement and aggregate shall be determined by weight. Water
shall either be measured by volume in calibrated tanks or weighed. All measuring
equipment shall be maintained in a clean, and serviceable condition. Their
accuracy shall be periodically checked.
It is most important to keep the specified water-cement ratio constant and at its
correct value. To this end, the moisture content in both fine and coarse aggregates
shall be determined by the Engineer-in-charge according to the weather conditions.
The amount of mixing water shall then be adjusted to compensate for variations in
the moisture content. For the determination of moisture content in the aggregates, IS:
2386 (Part III) shall be referred to. Suitable adjustments shall also be made in the
46
weights of aggregates to allow for the variation in weights of aggregates due to
variation in their moisture content.
The minimum cement and maximum water cement ratio and minimum grade of
concrete is given below:-
TABLE – A
Minimum cement content, maximum water-cement ratio and minimum grade of
concrete for different exposures with Normal weight aggregates of 20 mm nominal
maximum size.
[Ref: Table: 5 of IS-456-2000]
Sr. Exposure Plain Concrete Reinforced Concrete

No.
Minimum Maximum Min. Minimum Maximum Min.
Cement Free Grade of Cement Free Grade of
Content Water- Concrete Content Water- Concrete
Kg/m3 Cement Kg/m3 Cement
Ratio Ratio
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 Mild 220 0.60 - 300 0.55 M-20
2 Moderate 240 0.60 M-15 300 0.50 M-25
3 Severe 250 0.50 M-20 320 0.45 M-30
4 Very 260 0.45 M-20 340 0.45 M-35
Severe
5 Extreme 280 0.40 M-25 360 0.40 M-40
Adjustments to Minimum Cement Contents for Aggregates other than 20 mm Nominal

Maximum Size
[ Ref : Table:6 of IS-456-2000]
Sr. Nominal Maximum Adjustment to minimum Cement

No. Aggregate Size Content in above table
(mm) (kg/m3)
(1) (2) (3)
1 10 + 40
2 20 0
3 40 -30
47
Limits of Chloride Content of Concrete
[ Ref : Table : 7 of IS-456-2000 ]
Sr. Type or Use of Concrete Maximum Total

No. Acid Soluble
Chloride Content
expressed as
kg/m3 of Concrete
(1) (2) (3)
1 Concrete containing metal and steam cured at 0.4
elevated temperature and prestressed concrete
2 Reinforced concrete or plain concrete containing 0.6
embedded metal
3 Concrete not containing embedded metal or any 3.0
material requiring protection from chloride
Condition of Exposure:
i) Severe - Marine Environment : Alternate wetting and drying due to sea

spray, alternate wetting and drying combined with seezing, buried in soil
(having corrosive effect); members in contact with water where the velocity of
flow and the bed material are likely to cause corrosion of concrete.
ii) Moderate - Condition other than ‘severe’
a) The minimum cement content is based on 20 mm size aggregates.

For larger size aggregates, it may be reduced suitably by not more
than 10%. Similarly for smaller size aggregates, it may be suitably
increased, but not more than 10%.
b) The cement content shall not exceed 540 kg/cu.m. of concrete.
iii) Ordinary / Nominal Concrete:
The ordinary / nominal concrete mix shall also be specified by mass.

Proportioning of sand shall be as per its dry volume and in case it is damp,
allowance for 'bulking' shall be made as per IS : 2386 (Part III).
Ingredients required for nominal mix concrete containing one 50 Kg. bag of
cement for different proportions of mix shall be as given in Table-2.
48
PROPORTION OF NOMINAL MIX CONCRETE
TABLE – 2
Grade of Total quantity of dry Proportion of fine Qty. of

Concrete aggregates by mass per 50 aggregate to-coarse water per
Kg. of cement, to be taken aggregate by mass. 50 Kg. of
as the sum of the individual cement
masses of fine & coarse Max. (Ltrs.)
aggregates, (Kg.), Max.
MM-7.5
625 Generally 1:2 for fine 45
M-10 aggregate to coarse
480 aggregate by volume but 34
M-15 subject to a upper limit of
330 1:1 ½ and a lower limit 1.2 32
½
Note No. 1: The proportions of the aggregates shall be adjusted from upper limit to lower
limit progressively as the grading of the fine aggregates becomes finer and
the maximum size of coarse aggregate becomes larger.
Note No. 2: The amount of water should be kept minimum required for proper workability.
The quantity given in Col. 4 is not to be exceeded.
Example
For an average grading of fine aggregate (that is Zone II of IS:383-1963) the

proportions shall be 1:1 ½ , 1:2 and 1:3, for maximum size of aggregates 10
mm, 20 mm and 40 mm respectively.
Note No. 3: A mix leaner than M 10 may be used for non-structural parts if specified on the
drawing or provided in the contract. In such case grading of aggregates shall
be as specified in the contract or on the drawings. Other requirements for
mixing, placing and curing shall be the same as specified in this section.
iii) QUANTITY OF WATER
The quantity of water shall be just sufficient to produce a dense concrete of required
workability and strength for the job. An accurate and strict control shall be kept on the
quantity of mixing water.
In the case of reinforced concrete work, workability shall be such that the concrete
surrounds and properly grips, all reinforcements. The degree of consistency, which
shall depend upon the nature of work and the methods of vibration of concrete, shall
be determined by regular slump tests. The following slump shall be adopted for
different types of works or as directed by the Engineer-in-charge.
Sr. No. Type of Work Where Vibrators Pump concrete

are Used
i) Mass Concrete in RCC 25 mm to 40 mm 80 mm to 100 mm
Foundations, Footings and
Retaining Walls
ii) Beams, Slabs & Columns 40 mm to 60 mm 100 mm to 120mm
Simply Reinforced
49
iii) Thin RCC Section or Section 50 mm to 80 mm 120 mm to
with Congested Steel 150 mm
Note: (i) With use of ordinary concrete the slump requirement specified above would
not be applicable.
(ii) The above referred slump shall be measured at pouring site & at pouring time
(i.e. after 30/40 minutes after mixing water in concrete). The mix design shall
have to be carried out accordingly.
(iii) The contractor will allow to use plasticizer of approved quality to achieve
required degree of workability. However, the cost of the plasticizer ad mixture
shall have to be born by the contractor.
6.0 MIXING CONCRETE
For manufacturing concrete, use of batching and mixing plant fully automatic
with a minimum output of 16 cu.m per hour with appropriate number of transit mixer
(min. 2 numbers with a minimum capacity 3 cu.m in working condition), concrete
pumps will be used only for superstructure casting, concrete boom along with other
accessories shall be mandatory and shall be kept in first class working condition and
so maintained throughout the construction. Mixing shall be continued till materials
are uniformly distributed and a uniform colour of the entire mass is obtained and
each individual particle of the coarse aggregate shows a complete coating of mortar
containing its proportionate amount of cement.
In no case shall the mixing be done for less than 2 minutes after all
ingredients have been put into the mixer.
Hand mixing of concrete is not permissible. For mixes lower than M-15,
ordinary machine mixing may be permitted only under exceptional circumstances
with the permission of the Engineer-in-charge in advance. In ordinary machine
mixing quantity of cement shall be increased by 10% above that
specified above but the cost of increased cement quantity shall be borne by the
Contractor. Mixers which have been out of use for more than 30 minutes shall be
thoroughly cleaned before putting in a new batch. Unless otherwise agreed to by the
Engineer-in-charge, the first batch of concrete from the mixer shall contain only two
thirds of the normal quantity of coarse aggregate. The mixing plant shall be
thoroughly cleaned before changing from one type of cement to another. Machine
mixing may be permitted only under exceptional circumstances with the permission
of the engineer in charge in advance.
In case of concrete for piling ordinary machine / mobile mini batching plant of
8 cu.m. Per hour capacity can be used as directed by Engineer in charge.
7.0 TRANSPORT, PLACING AND COMPACTION OF CONCRETE
The method of transporting and placing concrete shall be through transit mixer as
approved by the Engineer-in- charge. Concrete shall be transported and placed such
that no contamination, segregation or loss of its constituent materials takes place.
All formwork and reinforcement contained in it shall be cleaned and made free from
standing water or dust, immediately before placing of concrete.
No concrete shall be placed in any part of the structure until the approval of the
Engineer-in-charge has been obtained in writing.
50
If concreting is not started within 24 hours of the approval being given, it shall have
to be obtained again from the Engineer-in-charge. Concreting shall then proceed
continuously over the area between construction joints. Fresh concrete shall not be
placed against concrete which has been in position for more than 30 minutes unless
it is ensured that there vibration limit of the earlier concrete is not crossed or a
proper construction joint is formed.
Concrete when deposited shall have a temperature of not less than 5 deg. C and not
more than 400 C unless otherwise specified. It shall be compacted in its final
position within 30 minutes of its discharge from the mixer unless carried in properly
designed agitators, operating continuously, in when this time shall be within 1 hour of
the addition of cement to the mix and within 30 minutes of its discharge from the
agitator, except where otherwise agreed to by the Engineer-in-charge, concrete shall
be deposited in horizontal layers to a compacted depth of not more than 0.45 m
when internal vibrators are used and not exceeding 0.30 m in all other cases.
Unless otherwise agreed to by the Engineer-in-charge, concrete shall not be

dropped into place from a height exceeding 1.5 meters. When trunking or chutes are
used, they shall be kept clean and used in such a way as to avoid segregation.
When concrete is conveyed by chute, the plant shall be of such size and design as
to ensure practically continuous flow. Slope of the chute shall be so adjusted that
the concrete flows without the use of an excessive quantity of water and without any
segregation of its ingredients. The delivery end of the chute shall be as close as
possible to the point of deposit. The chute shall be thoroughly flushed with water
before and after each working period and the water used for this purpose shall be
discharged outside the formwork.
When concreting has to be resumed on a surface which has hardened, it shall be

roughened, swept clean, thoroughly wetted and covered with a layer of neat cement
grout. This shall be followed by a 10 mm thick layer of mortar composed of cement
and sand in the same ratio as in the concrete mix itself. This 10 mm layer of mortar
shall be freshly mixed and placed immediately before placing of new concrete.
Where concrete has not fully hardened, all laitance shall be removed by scrubbing
the wet surface with wire or bristle brushes, care being taken to avoid dislodgement
of any particles of coarse aggregate. The surface shall then be thoroughly wetted, all
free water removed, and then coated with neat cement grout. The first layer of
concrete to be placed on this surface shall not exceed 150 mm in thickness, and
shall be well rammed against old work, particular attention being given to comers
and close spots.
All concrete shall be compacted to produce a dense homogeneous mass with the
assistance of vibrators, unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer-in-charge for
exceptional cases, such as concrete under water, where vibrators cannot be used.
Sufficient vibrators, in serviceable condition, shall be kept at site so that spare
equipment is always available in the event of breakdowns.
The performance requirements of vibrators shall conform to relevant IS Codes.

Vibration shall not be applied through reinforcement, and where vibrators of the
immersion type are used, contact with reinforcement and all inserts shall be avoided
as far as practicable.
51
8.0 CONCRETING UNDER WATER
When it is necessary to deposit concrete under water, the methods, equipment,

materials and proportions of the mix to be used shall be got approved from the
Engineer-in-charge before any work is started. Such concrete shall not be
considered as 'Controlled Concrete'.
Concrete shall not be placed in water having temperature below 50C. The
temperature of the concrete, when deposited, shall be not less than 160C., not more
than 400C.
While carrying out mix design. It shall be considered that Concrete shall contain 10
per cent more cement than that required for the same mix placed in the dry. The
materials shall be so proportioned as to produce a concrete having a slump of not
less than 100 mm. and not more than 180 mm. The slump shall be tested as per
latest IS: 516.
Coffer-dams or forms shall be sufficiently tight to ensure still water conditions if

practicable, and in any case to reduce the flow of water to less than 3 metres per
minute through the space into which concrete is to be deposited. Coffer-dams or
forms in still water shall be sufficiently tight to prevent loss of mortar through the
joints in the wells. Pumping shall not be done while concrete is being placed, or until
24 hours thereafter.
Concrete shall be deposited continuously until it has been brought to the required
height. While depositing, the top surface shall always be kept as nearly level as
possible and formation of seams avoided. For depositing concrete any one of the
following methods may be used:
a) Tremie
When concrete is to be deposited under water by means of tremie, the top section of
the tremie shall be a hopper large enough to hold one full batch of the mix or the
entire contents of the transporting bucket if any. The tremie pipe shall not be less
than 200mm in diameter, and shall be large enough to allow a free flow of concrete
and strong enough to withstand the external pressure of the water in which it is
suspended, even if a partial vacuum develops inside the pipe. Preferably, flanged
steel pipe of adequate strength for the job shall be used. A separate lifting device
shall be provided for each tremie pipe with its hopper at the upper end. Unless the
lower end of the pipe is equipped with an approved automatic check valve, the upper
end of the pipe shall be plugged with a wadding of gunny sacking or other approved
material before delivering the concrete to the tremie pipe through the hopper, so that
when the concrete is forced down from the hopper to the pipe it will force the plug
(and along with it any water in the pipe) down the pipe and out of the bottom end,
thus establishing a continuous stream of concrete. It will be necessary to raise
slowly the tremie in order to allow a uniform flow of concrete, but it shall not be
emptied so that water enters above the concrete in the pipe. At all times after the
placing of concrete is started and until all the required quantity has been placed, the
lower end of the tremie pipe shall be kept below the top surface of the plastic
concrete. This will cause the concrete to build up from below instead of flowing out
over the surface, and thus avoid formation of layers of laitance. If the charge in the
tremie is lost while depositing, the tremie shall be raised above the concrete surface,
and unless sealed by a check valve it shall be re-plugged at the top end, as at the
beginning, before refilling for depositing further concrete.
52
b) Drop Bottom Bucket
The top of the bucket shall be closed. The bottom doors shall move freely downward
and outward when tripped. The bucket shall be filled completely and lowered slowly
to avoid backwash. It shall not be dumped until it rests on the surface upon which the
concrete is to be deposited and when discharged shall be withdrawn slowly until well
above the concrete.
To minimize the formation of laitance, great care shall be exercised not to disturb the
concrete as far as possible while it is being deposited.
9.0 CURING OF CONCRETE
9.1 PROTECTION AND WATER CURING
Immediately after compaction, concrete shall be protected against harmful effects of

weather, including rain, running water, shocks, vibration, traffic, rapid temperature
changes and premature drying out. It shall be covered with wet sacking, Hessian or
other similar absorbent material approved by the Engineer-in-charge soon after the
initial set, and shall be kept continuously wet for a period of not less than 21 days
from the date of placement. Masonry work over the foundation concrete may be
started after 48 hours f its laying but the curing of concrete shall be continued for a
minimum period of 21 days.
9.2 STEAM CURING
Where steam curing is adopted it shall be ensured that it is done in a suitable

enclosure to contain the live steam in order to minimize moisture and heat losses.
The initial application of the steam shall be from two to four hours after the final
placement of concrete to allow the initial set of the concrete to take place.
Where retarders are used, the waiting period before application of the steam shall be
increased from four to six hours.
The steam shall be at 100% relative humidity to prevent loss of moisture and to
provide excess moisture for proper hydration of the cement. The application of steam
shall not be directly on the concrete, and the ambient air temperature shall increase
at a rate not exceeding 5 deg. cent. per hour until a maximum temperature of 60 deg.
cent. to 70 deg. cent. is reached. The maximum temperature shall be maintained
until the concrete has reached the desired strength.
When steam curing is discontinued the ambient air temperature shall not drop at a
rate exceeding 5 deg. cent per hour until a temperature of about 10 deg. cent. above
the temperature of the air to which the concrete will be exposed, has been reached.
10.0 WORKING IN EXTREME WEATHER
When depositing concrete in very hot weather, precautions shall be taken so that the
temperature of wet concrete does not exceed 38 deg. C while placing. This shall be
achieved by stacking aggregate under sheds and keeping it moist using cold water or
crushed or flaked ice if specified and permitted by the Engineer, reducing the time
between mixing and placing to the minimum, cooling formwork by sprinkling water on
53
the exterior, starting curing before the concrete dries out and restricting concreting,
as far as possible, to mornings and evenings.
During hot weather and rains the concrete shall be covered with tarpaulin and
transported and placed in the forms and consolidated to final state. Commencement
of concrete pours shall be avoided during heavy rains, storms and high winds.
11.0 FINISHING
Immediately after the removal of forms, all exposed bars or bolts passing through the
reinforced cement concrete member and used for shuttering or any other purpose
shall be cut inside the reinforced cement concrete member to a depth of at least 25
mm below the surface of the concrete and the resulting holes be closed by cement
mortar.
All cavities produced by the removal of form ties, all holes and depressions, honey-
comb spots, broken edges or comers and all other defects shall be thoroughly
cleaned, saturated with water and carefully pointed and rendered true with mortar of
cement and fine aggregate mixed in the proportions used in the grade of concrete
that is being finished and of as dry a consistency as is possible to use. Considerable
pressure shall be applied in filling and pointing to ensure thorough filling in all voids.
Surfaces which have been filled/pointed shall be kept moist for a period of twenty-
four hours. Any repair and rectification of defective work is to be undertaken and
carried out as directed by the Engineer-in-charge.
If soft pockets/honey-combs, in the opinion of the Engineer-in-charge, are of such an

extent or character as to affect the strength of the structure materially or to endanger
the life of the steel reinforcement, he may declare the concrete defective and require
the removal and replacement of the portions of the structure affected.
All construction and expansion joints in the completed work shall be left carefully
tooled and free from any mortar and concrete. Expansion joint filler shall be left
closed for its full length with clean and true edges.
Specification for form liners for aesthetic treatment to concrete elements :
Aesthetic treatment to the concrete elements shall be executed using polyurethane

elastomeric form liner system. The form liner adherence to the moulds, the flexibility,
elasticity and other parameters shall be as per Reckli standards. The gluing shall be
done using primers and adhesives as per Reckli specifications.
12.0 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
Concreting shall be carried out continuously up to the construction joints, the position
and details of which shall be as shown on approved drawings or as directed by the
Engineer-in-charge. Such joints shall, however, be kept to the minimum.
For a vertical construction joint, a stopping board shall be fixed previously at the pre-
determined position and shall be properly stayed for sufficient lateral rigidity to
prevent its displacement or bulging when concrete is compacted against it.
Concreting shall be continued right up to the board. The board shall not be removed
before the expiry of the specified period for removal of vertical forms.
54
Before resuming work at a construction joint where the concrete has not yet folly
hardened, all laitance shall be removed thoroughly, care being taken to avoid
dislodgement of coarse aggregates.
When work has to be resumed on a surface which has hardened, the surface shall
be thoroughly hacked, swept clean, wetted and covered with a layer of neat cement
grout. The neat cement grout shall be followed by a 13 mm thick layer of mortar
mixed in the same proportion as in the concrete and concreting resumed
immediately thereafter. The first batch of concrete shall be rammed against the old
work to avoid formation of any soft pockets, particular attention being paid to comers
and close spots.
In all cases, the position and detailed arrangement of all construction joints shall be
predetermined and got approved by the Engineer-m-charge.
13.0 TESTS AND STANDARDS OF ACCEPTANCE
13.1 PRELIMINARY TESTS FOR CONTROLLED CONCRETE
For controlled concrete preliminary tests referred to m Para 2.1 & 3.0 shall consist of
three sets of separate tests, and in each set, tests shall be conducted on six
specimens. Not more than one set of six specimens shall be made on any particular
day. Of the six specimens in each set, three shall be tested at seven days and the
remaining three at 28 days. The preliminary tests of 7 days are intended only to
indicate the strength likely to be attained at 28 days.
13.2 WORK STRENGTH TESTS FOR CONTROLLED AND NORMAL CONCRETE
Samples from concrete shall be taken as per IS : 1199 and cubes shall be made,
cured and tested in accordance with IS 516. Each test shall be of six specimens,
three of which shall be tested at seven days and the remaining three at 28 days. The
cubes shall be made at the rate of one set for every 50 cubic meter of concrete or a
part thereof for each grade. However, if in each grade concreting done in a day is
less than 15 cubic meter, the number of cubes can be reduced to 6 with the specific
permission of the Engineer-in-charge.
Similar works tests shall be carried out whenever the quality and grading of materials
is changed irrespective of the quantity of concrete poured. The number of specimens
may be suitably increased as deemed necessary by the Engineer-in-charge, when
procedure of tests given above reveals a poor quality of concrete and in other special
cases.
All work shall be carried out under the supervision of a qualified and a competent
Engineer who will supervise proportioning, placing and compacting of concrete at all
stages.
All necessary labour, materials, equipment, etc. for sampling, preparing test cubes,
curing, etc., shall be provided by the Contractor. Testing of the materials and
concrete may be arranged by the Engineer-in-charge in an approved laboratory at
the cost of the contractor.
55
13.3 STANDARD OF ACCEPTANCE
The average strength of the group of cubes cast for each day shall not be less than
the specified works cube strength. 20 percent of the cubes cast for each day may
have values less than the specified strength, provided the lowest value is not less
than 85 per cent of specified strength.
13.4 MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATION: TESTING RESULTS ETC.
For all materials required for concrete construction including cement, aggregate,
water, reinforcing and prestressing steel the original copies of test certificates, test
results etc. either carried out by the manufacturer or any other agency, the mix
design recommendations etc. shall be submitted to the Engineer-in-charge for his
approval and record. It shall remain the property of the Engineer-in-charge.
13.5 CHLORIDE / SULPHATE CONTENTS
Since the chloride contents of the constituent materials of the concrete would be
additive, it is desirable to keep a check on the overall chloride / sulphate contents of
the concrete to keep it minimal. Specially, for prestressed concrete, the total chloride
/ sulphate contents of the concrete when manufactured according to the
requirements of workability and strength shall be as given below. The cost of testing
for the chloride / sulphate contents of the ingredients of concrete and of undertaking
remedial measures if the chloride / sulphate contents is more than the permissible
limit shall be borne by the contractor.
a) Total water soluble sulphate (S02) content of the concrete mix expressed as
(SO2) shall not exceed 4 per cent by mass of cement used in the mix.
b) Total chloride content m concrete expressed as chloride-ion shall not exceed
the following values by mass of content used :
Type Per Cent

PSC 0.10
R.C.C. (in severe condition of closure) 0.20
R.C.C. (in moderate condition of exposure and PCC 0.30
14.0 REPAIR WORK
Concrete with satisfactory test results by with otherwise minor defects shall only be
considered unsatisfactory. It shall be allowed to be repaired by cutting out the
unsatisfactory material and by replacing it with new concrete, if so allowed by the
Engineer-in-charge. Voids to be so filled shall be provided with anchors, keys or
dovetail slots wherever necessary to attach the new material securely in place.
Surface of prepared voids shall be wetted for 24 hours immediately before the
patching material is placed. Repair of concrete shall be made by skilled workmen.
Repairs shall be made as soon as practicable after removal of forms and in a manner
to meet the requirements for the finish specified for the particular location.
For repair of the concrete works, the contractor may use epoxy as a bonding agent
prior to placing fresh concrete. The use or otherwise of epoxy for the repair work will
be at the discretion of the Engineer-in-charge. Epoxies shall be applied in strict
accordance with the instructions of the manufacturer.
56
Epoxy is a two packed or three packed system containing base and hardener/s. The
shelf life of the unmixed cans is about one year or more when stored in a place
where ambient temperature does not increase beyond 75 deg. F. The base and
hardener/s shall be mixed in the correct proportions recommended by the
manufacturer. The blend, after mixing intimately, shall have a pot life of one hour and
the material shall be applied over the old concrete to form a thin film. Fresh concrete
shall be deposited immediately prior to the film drying up so as to ensure proper
bonding between both concrete.
Where the dry pack method is used, holes shall be sharp and square at the surface
edges, but comers within holes shall be rounded. The perimeter of the hole shall be
under-cut in several places. Holes for dry pack shall have a minimum depth of 25mm.
The holes to be repaired shall be scrupulously clean and slightly wet with no free
water on the surface. The surface shall then be dusted lightly with cement by means
of dry brush. Under no conditions shall the holes be painted with neat cement grout.
The dry pack mix shall be proportioned by weight: I part cement to 2.5 parts of sand
that will pass a No. 16 screen. Only enough water shall be used to produce a mortar
which will stick together when moulded into a ball by a slight pressure of the hands
and will not extrude water but will leave the hands just damp.
Dry pack material shall be placed and packed in layers having a compacted
thickness of about 10mm. Each layer shall be solidly contacted over its entire
surface by use of hardwood stick and hammer. The stick is normally about 300mm to
460mm long and not over 30mm in diameter. Most of the tamping should be directed
at a slight angle and towards the side of the hole to assure maximum compaction
and bond. Water shall not be used to facilitate finishing.
Filling material used in repair of surfaces which will be exposed after completion of
the project shall be made with cement from the same sources as that used in
concrete and blended with a sufficient amount of white Portland cement to produce
the same color as in the adjoining concrete. Patched surfaced shall be given a final
treatment as required to make the texture of the patch match that of the surrounding
material.
Immediately after patching is completed, the patched area shall be covered with an
approved non-staining, water-saturated material which shall be kept wet and
protected against sun and wind for a period of 12 hours. Thereafter, the patched area
shall be kept continuously wet by a fine spray or sprinkling of water for not less than
10 days as required. The layers of gunite may be reinforced with steel mesh if
directed by the Engineer-in-charge.
All materials, procedures and operations used in the repair of concrete and also the
finished work shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer-in-charge. All fillings
shall be tightly bonded to the concrete and shall be sound, free from shrinkage
cracks, or dummy areas after the fillings have been cured and dried.
The extent of repair shall be decided upon by the Engineer-m-charge. The cost of
repairs of defective areas shall be borne by the contractor. The Engineer-in-charge
may adopt at his discretion any other method of repairing like grouting with cement
grout, epoxy grouts or guniting etc., which will be carried out by the contractor at his
cost as per the specifications supplied by the Engineer.
57
15.0 USE OF PLUMS IN ORDINARY CONCRETE
Use or plums in concrete shall not be permitted.
16.0 LAUNCHING METHOD OF PSC I GIRDER
Step 1) Cast PSC– I Girder at casting yard.
Step 2) Carryout Ist Stage Prestressing of I Girder at casting yard.
Step 3) Launch I-Girder by using pneumatic rubber tyres type crane by two point
Lifting Method, using Spread beams. (I.e. Lift PSC- I Girder at C/C of
bearing location.)
Step 4) Place all Girders above their respective bearing location.
Step 5) Cast Deck slab over it.
Step 6) Carry out Stage 2 Prestressing.
Step 7) Entire operation shall be carry out by skilled labour only.
17.0 MEASUREMENT FOR PAYMENT
i) The cement concrete shall be measured in cubic meters. In reinforced concrete the
volume occupied by reinforcement shall not be deducted.
ii) Any concrete used in excess of the theoretical dimensions as shown on the
drawings will not be paid.
iii) Unacceptable work:
All defective concreting work, including but not limited to defects arising out of honey-
combing, under sizing, under strength, etc. will have to be demolished and rebuilt by
the Contractor at his own cost as may be directed by the Engineer-in- charge. In the
event of such works being accepted by carrying out repairs etc. as suggested by the
contractor and accepted by the Engineer-in-charge. He will be paid for the work
actually carried out by him at the reduced rate as may be asked by the Engineer-in-
charge for portion of the work that may be accepted with repairs done by the
Contractor.
18.0 RATE
The unit rate for concrete shall include the cost of all materials, labour, tools and
plant required for mixing, placing in position, vibrating and compacting, finishing as
per directions of the Engineer-in-charge, curing and all other incidental expenses for
producing concrete of specified strength to complete the structure or its components
as shown on the drawings and according to these specifications. The rate shall also
include the cost of making, fixing and removing of all centers and forms required for
the work unless otherwise specified in the contract.
All expenses likely to be incurred by the contractor in transporting materials procured

at the site of works, the expenses incurred in improving the quality of materials to
acceptable levels (such as screening, washing, etc.) and expenses incurred in proper
58
storage of materials as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge etc. are to be included in
the
unit rate.
18.0 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
18.1 BENDING OF REINFORCEMENT
Reinforcing steel shall conform accurately to the dimensions shown on relevant

drawings and conforming to IS: 2502.
Bars shall be bent cold to the specified shape and dimensions or as directed by the
Engineer-in-charge using a proper bar bender, operated by hand or power to attain
proper radii of bends. Bars shall not be bent or straightened in a manner that will
injure the material. Bars beat during transport or handling shall be straightened
before being used on work; they shall not be heated to facilitate bending. Unless
otherwise specified, a U type hook at the end of each bar shall invariably be
provided. The hook shall be of required as specified in IRC code of practices. In
case of deformed or bars which are not round, the diameter shall be taken as the
diameter of a circle having an equivalent effective area. The deformed bar shall have
standard L hooks when under tension. The hook shall be suitably encased with
adequate concrete cover to prevent any splitting of the concrete.
Before cutting and bending a full scale sketch shall be drawn on a levelled platform
and lengths measured before cutting.
18.2 PLACING OF REINFORCEMENT
All reinforcing bars shall be accurately placed in the exact position shown on the
drawings, and shall be securely held in position during placing of concrete by
annealed binding wire not less than 1 mm in size and conforming to IS: 280, and by
using stays, concrete blocks of same strength of concrete or metal chairs, spacers,
metal hangers, supporting wires or other approved devices at sufficiently close
intervals. Bars will not be allowed to sag between supports nor displaced during
concreting or any other operation over the work. All devices used for positioning
shall be of non-corrodible material Wooden and metal supports will not extend to the
surface of concrete, except where shown on the drawings. Placing bars on layers of
freshly laid concrete as the work progresses for adjusting bar spacing will not be
allowed. Pieces of broken stone, brick or wooden blocks shall not be used. Layers of
bars shall be separated by spacer bars, precast concrete blocks of same strength of
concrete or other approved devices only.
Reinforcement after being placed in position shall be maintained in a clear condition

until completely embedded in concrete. Special care shall be exercised to prevent
any displacement of reinforcement in concrete already placed.
To protect reinforcement from corrosion, concrete cover shall be provided as

indicated on the drawings. All bars protruding from concrete to which other bars are
to be spliced and which are likely to be exposed for an indefinite period shall be
protected by a thick coat of neat cement slurry.
In the case of columns and walls, vertical bars shall be kept in normal position with
timber templates having slots accurately cut in for bar position. Such templates shall
be removed after the concreting has progressed up to a level just below them.
59
Bars crossing each other, where required, shall be secured by annealed binding wire
of size not less than 1 mm and conforming to IS:280 in such a manner that they do
not slip over each other at the time of fixing and concreting. As far as possible, bars
of full length shall be used. In case this is not possible, overlapping of bars shall be
done as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge. Overlapping bars shall be bound with
annealed steel wire, not less than 1 mm thickness twisted tight. The overlaps shall
be staggered for different bars and located at points along the span where neither
shear nor bending moment is maximum. However at any section not more than 50%
of bar shall be spliced for FE-415 / 500 grade bar and not more than 25% for Fe-240
grade bars.
18.3 WELDING OF BARS
When permitted or specified on the drawings, joints of reinforcement bars shall be

butt- welded so as to transmit their full strength. Welded joints shall preferably be
located at points where the reinforcement steel will not be subject to more than 75
percent of the maximum permissible stresses and the welded joints should be
staggered such that, at any one section, not more than 20 percent of the rods are
welded. Only electric arc welding using a process which excludes air from the
molten metal and conforms to any or all other special provisions for the work will be
accepted. Suitable means shall be provided for holding the bars securely in position
during welding. It must be ensured that no voids are left in welding and when
welding is done in 2 or 3 stages, the previous surfaces shall be cleaned properly.
Ends of the bars shall be cleaned of all loose scale, rust, grease, paint and other
foreign matter before welding. Only competent welders shall be employed on the
work.
The M.S electrodes used for welding shall conform to IS: 814.
Welding of Fe-240 bars conforming to IS-432 shall be permitted. Welding of other

grades of bars including Fe 415/500 grade bars conforming to IS-1786 shall in
general be prohibited.
Welded pieces of reinforcement shall be tested. Specimens shall be taken from the
actual site and their number and the frequency of tests shall be as directed by the
Engineer-in-charge.
18.4 MEASUREMENT FOR PAYMENT
Reinforcement shall be measured in length, separately for different diameters, as

actually used in the work including overlaps. From the length so measured the weight
of reinforcement shall be calculated in tones as per IS: 1732. Lengths shall also
include
hooks at ends. Wastage, avoidable overlaps, couplings, welded joints and annealed
steel wire for binding shall not be measured and cost of these items shall be deemed
to be included in the rates for reinforcement.
18.5 RATE
Rate for reinforcement shall include cost of all steel, its bending, placing, binding and
fixing in position as shown on the drawings and as directed by the Engineer-in-
charge. It shall also include cost of all devices for keeping reinforcement in approved
position, cost of jointing as per approved method, and tests to be carried out.
60
19.0 PRESTRESSED CONCRETE WORK
19.1 CONCRETE WORKS
The Specifications for prestressed concrete works shall conform to IRC-18. The
materials, concrete mix design, sampling and testing and acceptance criteria shall
satisfy provisions of relevant clauses of IRC : 18 and unless otherwise directed by
the Engineer.
The workmanship i.e. mixing, transportation, planning and compaction, curing,

finishing shall conform to relevant clauses for plain and reinforced concrete.
a) Measurement of Payment
The prestressed concrete shall be measured in cubic meters. The volume occupied
by mild steel and high tensile shall not be deducted. All steel shall be measured
separately. Only finished work can be paid.
b) Rate
The rate for prestressed concrete shall include shuttering and all as indicated in
Section 1815 of M.O.R.T.H.(fourth revision) specifications except steel which shall be
paid separately. The rate for steel shall include all as indicated in Section 1609 of
M.O.R.T.H.(fourth revision) specifications.
19.2 PRESTRESSING WORKS
(a) The specifications of prestressing works shall conform to IRC : 18 in all respects
unless otherwise specified herein.
(b) Workmanship for prestressing work shall conform to Section 1803 of

M.O.R.T.H.(fourth revision) specifications. Tensioning equipment and Tensioning
Procedure shall conform to Section 1804 and Section 1805 of M.O.R.T.H.(fourth
revision) specification respectively.
Testing of sheathing duct shall be conducted as per Appendix 1-B of IRC: 18 and
approved sheathing shall only be used.
(c) Cement grouting of prestressing cables shall be done strictly following specifications
as indicated in Appendix 2 of IRC: 18. Grouting materials, equipment, properties of
grout and its mixing, grouting operations and precautions to be taken shall conform to
relevant clauses of IRC : 18 and as directed by the Engineer. Any modification
whatsoever directed by the Engineer for grouting operations shall be undertaken by
the Contractor without any extra cost.
(d) The specifications given hereunder shall be read in conjunction with IRC: 18.
(i) The stress induced in the tendons shall be determined by measurement of

elongation and also independently by direct measurement of force using a
pressure gauge or other means. The two determinations shall check each
other and the theoretical values within a tolerance of 5%.
(ii) Calculations for elongations and gauge readings must include appropriate
allowance for frictions, strand wire slippage and other factors as applicable.
61
(iii) Wire failure in tendons : Failure of wires in a post tensioning, tendon is
acceptable provided the total area of wire failure is not more than 2 per cent
of the total area of tendon in any member and also provided the engineer is
satisfied that the failure is not symptomatic of more extensive distress
condition. However emergency cables/ strands shall he provided as per
IRC-18. If the total area failure exceeds 2% representative samples from
the whole batch shall be got tested again. The high tensile steel shall be
used further, only if the test results are found satisfactory.
(iv) Prior to stringing of strands, bottom forms shall he inspected for cleanliness
and accuracy of alignment. From surfaces to be in contact with concrete
must be treated with an effective release agent. Special care must be
exercised to prevent contamination of strands from release agents grease
or other coatings.
(v) The alignment and positioning of ducts within the member is critical. Short
links and wobbles shall be avoided. Ale trajectory of ducts shall not depart
from the curve or straight fines shown in the drawing by more than I in 240.
The cable position shall not deviate by more than 5 nun from the designed
trajectory vertically.
(vi) Method of prestressing; Schedule and sequence of tensioning tendons shall
be as shown in the drawing.
(vii) The rate of applicators of load shall be in accordance with manufacturers
recommended procedure for post tensioning. Slip must he measured at
each end and the extension for the total length.
(viii) Anchorage: Anchorage devices for all post tensioning systems must be
aligned with the direction of the axes of the tendons at the point attachment.
Concrete surfaces, against which the anchorage devices bear just be
normal to this line of direction. Accurate measurement of anchorage losses
due to slippage or other causes shall be made and compared with the
assumed losses shown in the post tensioning schedule and when
necessary, adjustments or corrections shall be made in the operation.
(e) Measurement for Payment.
Method of measurement shall be as per section 1809 of M.O.R.T.H. specifications.

High tensile steel for prestressing shall be measured in tonnes. The length of cables
shall be measured as actually used in the finished work excluding stand by cable/
strands and weight shall be calculated on the basis of IS : 1732. Anchorage devices,
ducts / metal sheath, etc., shall not be measured separately.
(f) Rate.
The unit rate high tensile steel shall cover the cost of all materials, including stand by
cable/ strands labour, tools and plant required for fixing, placing, tensioning,
anchoring and grouting the high tension steel all complete. The rate shall also include
cost of anchoring devices, ducts/ metal sheath, grout, etc., all required to complete
the work.
(g) Cracking
The principal objective of prestressing is the application of sufficient forces to

concrete so that members can he cast and placed in service without cracks. Some
hair line cracks which may form during casting or curing if superficial have no
detrimental effect on the structural capacity of member. However, to prevent any
62
possible corrosion through hair cracks, deterioration of concrete suitable surface
treatment as approved by the Engineer shall he given to the exposed surface.
The following precautions shall be taken by Contractor to avoid cracking.

(i) Ensure proper curing.
(ii) Release side forms as soon as practicable.
(iii) Use hoop steel around tendons near ends of beams.
(iv) Handle only from designated pick-up points.
(v) Take adequate care during storage, transportation and erections.
(h) Inspection and Records
In general the scope of inspections to be performed in prestressing work shall include

the following:
(i) Identification examination, acceptance and laboratory testing of
materials.
(ii) Inspecting and recording of tensioning.
(iii) Inspecting of beds and forms prior to concreting.
(iv) Checking of dimensions of members, positions of tendons,
reinforcing steel, other incorporated materials, opening, block out, etc.
(v) Continual inspection of batching, mixing converting, placing,
compacting, finishing and curing of concrete.
(vi) Preparation of concrete specimens for tests and performing of tests
for slump, air content, cube, strength etc.
(vii) General observations of casting site, equipments, working
conditions, whether and other items affecting product.
(viii) Final inspection of finished member.
(i) Record Keeping :
In order to establish evidence of proper manufacture and quality of prestressed

concrete members, a system of records as mentioned below shall be maintained by
the Contractor. Two copies of the records shall be made and one copy duly signed
by the Contractor shall be handed over to the Engineer.
(i) Each prestressed concrete member shall be identified by bed and date cast
and an identification number which should be referenced to tensioning
records, concreting records, cube strength records. Keeping these records
shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
(ii) Submission of certified test reports for materials such as high tensile steel
brought by the Contractor is the responsibility of the Contractor. These
reports shall show that the materials comply with the application
specifications.
(iii) An accurate record of tensioning operation shall be kept. This record shall
include, but not be limited to, the following :
(a) Date of tensioning.

(b) Casting bed identification.
63
(c) Description, identification and number of members.
(d) Manufacturer, size and class of tendon.
(e) Identification of jacking equipment.
(f) The actual net elongation of each tendon with allowance made for
elastic shortening of member.
(g) Date on and date of grouting.
(h) Any unforeseen problems encountered during tensioning such as wire
breakage, excessive slippage or other factors having an influence on
the net stress.
(iv) Records of concrete operation and test shall be kept so that the following data
will be recorded for each member or each group of members cast on one
bed:
(a) Date, time and duration of casting.

(b) Mix proportion
(c) Mixing water corrections.
(d) Identification of casting bed and members.
(e) Cube Identification.
(f) Ambient temperature, weather condition and concrete temperature.
(g) Slump
(h) Method and duration of steam curing, if proposed.
(i) Strength at prestressing.
(j) 28 days cube strength.
(v) All jacking and loading measuring equipment shall be calibrated to the
satisfaction of the Engineer. Calibration data shall show the following :
(a) Date of calibration

(b) Agency or laboratory performing calibration.
(c) Method of calibration.
(d) A curve showing the full range of calibration with gauge readings
plotted against actual load.
(j) Dimensional Tolerances:

The permissible dimensional tolerances are given below :
a) In the length of member +/- 20 mm

b) Flange width +/- 10 mm
c) Depth + 10 mm
d) Flange thickness + 8 mm
- 4 mm
e) Web thickness + 8 mm
f) Camber deviation from design camber + 20 mm
- 20 mm
g) Position of tendons (in vertical plane) +/- 5 mm
h) Bottom width +/- 10 mm
i) Bottom thickness + 8 mm
- 4 mm
j) Position of handling devices +/- 150 mm
k) Square ness of alignments +/- 10 mm
Tolerances against items (a), (j) and (k) are for 50 m lengths. For other length they
shall be proportional.
64
The contractor shall ensure the dimensions of the member within the above
tolerances. In case of PSC members not complying with the dimensional
requirement within the tolerances, remedial measures as required by the Engineer
shall be carried out, if the same are remediable. Otherwise, the PSC member is
liable to be rejected.
20.0 Formwork, False work and Scaffolding:

All centering, formwork and temporary works shall be constructed according to duly
approved drawings and specification. The design criteria and loading for these works
shall be as per American Concrete Institute relevant specifications.
As soon as practicable after the acceptance of his tender the contractor shall submit
a scheme showing the order of the procedure and methods by which he proposed to
carry out the work together with such details as are necessary to demonstrate the
adequacy, stability and safety of the methods which the contractor propose to adopt.
The approval to the general scheme of centering as well as design criteria and
loading shall be obtained in good time to facilitate all preparatory work. Any delay on
this account shall be the responsibility of the contractor.
Not withstanding the approval given to the design criteria and loading and the
general scheme for the centering, the entire responsibility for the satisfactory
execution of the centering and all temporary works shall rest with the contractor and
he shall be liable to pay all claims and compensation arising from any loss or
damage to life and property due to any deficiency, failure or malfunctioning of the
centering or all the temporary works.
1. Reuse of Forms etc:

Forms required to be used more than once shall be maintained in serviceable
conditions and shall be thoroughly cleaned and repaired before reuse. Where metal
sheets are used for lining forms the sheets shall be placed and maintained in the
forms with minimum amount of wrinkles, lumps or other imperfections. All forms shall
be checked for shape and strength before reuse.
2. Erection and removal of forms. :

i) Before placing concrete the surface of all forms shall be covered with suitable
nonstaining form releasing agents such as raw lines oil so as to prevent
sticking of concrete and to facilitate removal of forms.
ii) The form releasing agent shall cover the forms fully and evenly without
excess overdrawn. Care shall be on the surface of the construction joints and
on reinforcement bars. Special care shall be taken to cover thoroughly the
form strips for narrow grooves, so as to prevent swelling of the forms and the
consequent damage to concrete prior to or during removal of forms.
iii) Immediately before concrete is placed care shall be taken to see that all
forms are in proper alignment and the supports and fixtures are properly
secured and tightened.
iv) Where forms for continuous surfaces are placed in successive units, the
forms shall lap and fit tightly over the completed surface so as to prevent
leakage of cement slurry from the fresh concrete and to maintain accurate
alignment of the surface.
v) Forms shall be left in place until their removal is authorized and shall then be
removed with care so as to avoid injury to concrete.
65
vi) Removal of forms shall never be started until the concrete is thoroughly set
and hardened adequately to carry its own weight, besides the live load which
is likely to come on the work during construction. The length of time for which
the forms shall remain in place shall be decided by the engineer-in-charge,
with reference to weather conditions, shape and position of the structure of
structural member and nature and amount of dead and live loads. In normal
circumstances and where ordinary Portland cement is used forms can be
allowed to be struck as under:
A Beam sides, walls, unloaded columns after 24 hours

B Slabs and arches (props left under) after 4 days
C Props to slabs and arches after 10 days
D Beam soffit (props left under) after 8 days
E Props to beams after 21 days
F Beam concrete (sides) after 2 days
Note: - Time shall be measured from last batch concrete in respect to the
structural member under consideration.
In no case shall forms be removed until there is an assurance that
removal can be accomplished without damaging the concrete surface.
Heavy loads shall not be permitted until after the concrete has
reached its design strength. The forms shall be removed with great
caution and without jerking the structure.
3. Settlement of Formwork and Camber :

Due to various reasons such as closure of form joints, shrinkage of timber, dead load
deflection, elastic shortening of form members formwork deflection or settlement may
occur. The members of the formwork must be rigid enough to prevent excessive
deflections the usual acceptable limit being 1/500 of the spans of the formwork. In the
absence of any specified camber on the drawings, soffit of all beams more than 5 m
in span and other than prestressed concrete beams shall be laid to a camber the
amount of which mid span shall not be less than 1/500 of the span of the structure.
The profile of soffit shall be parabolic.
4. Mock-Ups:
The method for pouring difficult zones of concrete will be pre-studied on mock-ups.
Mock-ups will be particularly necessary for the following :
i) Zones around penetrations and openings.
ii) Behind anchorages of prestressed members.
iii) Dome and hell in general requiring single and double forms.
iv) Various zones of large thickness for studying placement temperatures in
relation to internal temperature build ups.
Work involved in mock-up pours will be paid for at the rates entered under relevant
items of work. Materials which are of free supply as mentioned in this document,
such as steel, embedment, etc. will also be supplied free for mock-up pours.
Sampling and testing of all samples will be done by the contractor. Unsuccessful
mock-ups may have to be repeated in full or in part as required by the engineer.
21.0 Tolerance:
All works will be carried out true to the lines, levels, and grades shown on the
drawings and within the tolerances specified below. The contractor shall establish,
erect and maintain in an undisturbed condition until final completion and acceptance
66
of the project control points and bench marks necessary and adequate to establish
these tolerances.
Departure from established alignment of all elements : 30 mm
Departure from established grades : 10 mm
Variation from plumb or specified : 12 mm in 3 m. (if exposed)
Batter in lines and surface of : (25 mm in 3m. if Back filled

columns, piers, walls and in
arises)
Variation from level or indicated : 12 mm in 3 m (if exposed)
Grade in slabs, beams, horizontal and railing offsets : 25 mm in 3 m. (if backfilled)
Variation in cross sectional dimensions of columns,

Piers, slabs, walls, beams and similar parts. : 6 mm plus 12 mm
Variation in slab thickness : -3 mm plus 6 mm
Footings / Plan dimensions : -15 mm plus 30 mm
Misplacement of eccentricity : -2% of footing which in the

direction of misplacement and
not exceeding 30 mm.
Reduction in thickness : -5% of specified Thickness.
Variation in size and locations of slabs, well : -12 mm.

Openings
Prestressed concrete cables : will be laid such that their

profile is a smooth curve unless
otherwise specified.
The alignment tolerances shall be as under.
Member with a depth of up to 200 mm : +/- d/40
200 – 1000 mm : +/- 5 mm
more than 1000 mm
: +/- 10 mm
Tolerance in direction of width of member
The level of tendon Upto 200 mm wide : +/- 5 mm
200 – 1000 mm wide
: +/- 10 mm
Slabs and beams of more than 1000
: +/- 20 mm
Mm width.
67
Tendon extensions will be measured up to 1 mm accuracy. The total prestressing force
applied to a beam shall not vary more than +3% from the design force specified and
measured in terms of the total elongations of all the tendons in that members.
In the case of slabs this variations shall be measured and restricted over a range of 5
consecutive tendons.
68
DETAILED SPECIFICATION OF THE ITEMS OF WORK TO BE CARRIED OUT
SCHEDULE-B1
ITEM NO: 1
Marking of the centre line along longitudinal axis and etc with total station, the odolite
including making drawings as per detailed specification and directed by engineer in
charge.
1. The center line axis of the dual two lane bridge is to be done for bridge and also for
approaches / retaining walls in both ends shall be surveyed along their lengths.
Center line pegs for each two lane bridge, ramps including foundation pegs at each
location and at suitable distance of 3.0 m c/c along the approach on each side shall
be fixed.
2. All deviation angles of the central line axis for both the two lane bridge including
tangent distances shall be demarcated with pegs fixed in to the ground.
The rate on Lump sum basis shall include all equipments, survey instruments, necessary
survey party, supply and fixing of pegs including, fixing of pillars for intermediate stations
labour, materials required in completing the job as required, as per direction of Engineer-in-
charge
ITEM NO: 2
Excavation for foundation in sand, gravel clay soft soils soft soils, soft rock, bentonit,
clay and murrum etc. including shorting, strutting and dewatering as necessary and
disposing of the excavated stuff as directed.
(A) Depth up to 3.00 M.
1. Excavation for structures shall consist of the removal of material for the construction
of foundations for culverts, retaining walls, cut of walls pipe culverts and other similar
structures, in accordance with the requirements of these specifications and the lines
and dimensions shown on the drawing or as indicated by the Engineer-in-charge.
The work shall include all necessary sheeting, shorting, bracing draining an pumping
and the removal of all logs, stumps, grubs and other deleterious matter and
obstructions necessary for placing the foundations, trimming bottoms of excavations,
backfilling and clearing up the site and the disposal of all surplus material.
2. After the site has been cleared the limits of excavation shall be set out true to lines,
curves and slopes.
3. Excavation shall be taken to the width of the lowest step of the footing. The
contractor at his own expense shall put up necessary shoring, strutting and planking
or cut slopes to a safer angle or both with due-regard to the safety of persons and
works and to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-charge.
4. The depth to which the excavation is to be carried out shall be as shown, on the
drawings, unless the type of material encouraged is such as to require changes, in
which case the depth shall be as ordered by the Engineer-in-charge.
69
5. Where waters is met with in excavation due to stream flow, seepage springs, rain or
other reasons, the contractor shall take adequate measures such as bailing,
pumping, constructing diversion channels drainage channels, and other necessary
work to keep the foundation trenches dry when so required and to protect green
concrete/masonry against damage by erosion or sudden rising of water level. The
method to be accepted in this regard and other details there of shall be left to the
choice of the contractor but subject to approval of the Engineer-in charge, Approval
of the Engineer-in-charge shall, however not relieve the contractor of the
responsibility for the adequacy of dewatering, and protection arrangements and for
the quality and safety of the work.
6. Pumping from the interior of any foundation enclosures shall be done in such manner
as to preclude the possibility of the movement of water through any fresh concrete.
No pumping shall be permitted during the placing of concrete or for any period of at
least 24 hours thereafter, unless it is done from a suitable sump separated from the
concrete work by a water tight wall or other similar means.
7. The bottom of the foundation shall be leveled both longitudinally and transversely or
stepped as directed by the Engineer-in-charge. Before footing is laid, the surface
shall be slightly watered and rammed. In the event of excavation having been made
deeper than that shown on the drawings or as otherwise ordered by the Engineer-in-
charge, the extra depth shall be made up with concrete or masonry of the foundation
grade at the cost of the contractor. Ordinary filling shall not be used for the purpose
of bringing the foundation to level. If there are any slips or blows in the excavation
these shall be removed by the contractor at his own cost.
8. Near towns, villages and all frequented places, trenches and foundation pits shall be
securely fenced, provided with proper caution signs and marked with red lights at
night to avoid accidents. The contractor shall be required to take adequate protective
measures to see that the excavation operations do not affect or damage adjoining
structures.
9. Backfilling shall be done with approved material after concrete or masonry is fully set
and carried out in such a way as not to cause under thrust on any part of the
structure. All space between foundation masonry or concrete and the sides of
excavation shall be refilled to the original surface, making due allowance for
settlement in 250 mm loose layers. This shall be watered and compacted.
10. All the excavated materials shall be the property of the Government. Where the
excavated material is directed to be used in the construction of embankment, it shall
be directly deposited at the required locations.
11. All useful materials, not intended for use in the bank, shall be stacked neatly on
Government land as directed by the Engineer-in-charge with all lead and lift.
Unsuitable and surplus materials not intended for use in any part of the road shall be
disposed off as directed by the Engineer-in-charge.
12. Excavation for structures shall be measured in cubic metres for each class of
material en-countered, limited to the dimensions shown on the drawings or as
directed by the Engineer-in-charge. Excavation over increased width, cutting of
slopes, shoring, shuttering and planking shall be deemed as convenience for the
Contractor in executing the work and shall not be measured and paid for separately.
70
13. The contract unit rate for the items of excavation for structures shall be paid in full for
carrying out the required operations including.
a. Setting out
b. Construction of necessary shoring and bracing and their subsequent removal:
c. Removal of all logs stumps, grubs and other deleterious matter and
obstructions for placing the foundations including trimming of bottoms of
excavations;
d. Foundation sealing, dewatering including pumping;
e. Backfilling, clearing up the site and disposal of all surplus material within all
lifts and leads up to 100 metres;
f. All labour, materials, tools, equipment, safeguards and incidentals necessary
to complete the work to the specification.
14. Excavation shall be for ordinary soil such as vegetable or organic soil, turf slit, and
loam, clay, mud, plat, black cotton soil, soft shale or soft murrum a mixture of these
and similar material which yields to the ordinary application of pick and shovel, rake
or other ordinary digging equipment. Removal of gravel or any other nodular material
having diameter in any one direction not exceeding 75 mm occurring in such strata
shall be deemed to be covered under this category. The classification of excavation
shall be decided by the Engineer-in-charge and his decision shall be final and binding
on the Contractor.
ITEM NO: 3
Providing & filling in foundation with ordinary cement concrete M100 mix and
providing necessary vertical pin headers including formwork vibrating ramming &
curing complete.
1. In case of ordinary concrete, mix is not required to be designed by preliminary tests

and proportions of cement, fine aggregates and case aggregates are specified by
volume as given in table below for grads designated as ordinary M.100.
2. In the designation of a concrete mix letter M refers to the mix and the number to the
specified 28 days works cube compressive strength of that mix on 150 mm cubes,
expressed in kg ./cm.
3. The ordinary concrete mix shall generally be specified by volume. For cement which
normally comes in bags and is used by weight, volume shall be worked out taking 50
kg of cement as 0.035 cubic meters in volume. While measuring aggregate by
volume, shaking, ramming or hammering shall not be done, proportioning of sand be
as per its dry volume. In case it is damp allowance for bulking shall be made as per
IS: 2386 (Part III).
4. In gradients required for ordinary concrete containing one 50 kg bag of cement for
different proportions of mix shall be as given in Table below.
71
TABLE
Grade of Mix by Total quantity of Proportion of Quantity of
concrete volume dry aggregate by fine aggregate water per 5 kg
volume per 50 kg to coarse of cement
cement to be aggregate maximum
taken as sum of
individual volume
of fine % coarse
aggregate
maximum (1
cubic metre =
1000 Liters)
1 2 3 4 5
M:100 1:3:6 300 Generally 1:2 34
M:150 1:2:4 220 for fine 32
M:200 1:1.5:3 160 aggregate by 30
M:250 1:1:2 100 volume but to a 27
upper limit of
1:1.5 and lower
limit of 1:3
* Note: The proportions of the aggregates shall be adjusted from upper limit to lower
limit progressively as the grading of the final aggregate becomes finer and the
maximum size of coarse aggregate becomes larger.
5. Following shall be the maximum nominal size of coarse aggregate for the different
items of work,
Maximum nominal size of Coarse

Sr. No. Item of construction
aggregate
(i) R.C.C. well curb, R.C.C. well staining and 40 mm
R.C.C. piles.
(ii) P.C.C. well staining 63 mm
(iii) Well cap or pile cap; solid type piers, abutments 40 mm
and wing-walls, their pier caps.
(iv) "R.C.C. works in cross girders, deck slab, 20 mm
wearing coarse, kerb, light posts, blast walls
approach slab etc., and hollow type piers,
abutments, wing-walls and their pier caps.
(v) R.C.C. bearings 20mm
(vi) For any other item of construction not covered As specified on the drawing or as
by items (i) to (v) above desired by the Engineer-in-charge in
case it is not specified on drawing.
6. Fine aggregate shall be clean, hard coarse sand. It shall be free from dust and such
other substances. The sand shall be got approved by the Engineer-in-charge.
7. All materials shall be stored as to prevent their deterioration or intrusion of their

quality and fitness for the work. Any material which has deteriorated or has been
damaged or is otherwise considered defective by the Engineer-in-charge shall not be
used in the work.
72
8. Cement shall be stored above the ground level in perfectly dry and watertight sheds
and shall be stocked not more than eight bags high. Wherever bulk storage
containers are used, their capacity should be sufficient to cater to the requirements at
site and should be cleaned at least once every 3 to 4 months. Cement more than 3 to
4 months old shall invariably be tested to ascertain that it satisfies the acceptability
requirements. The aggregates shall be stored in such a way as to prevent admixture
of foreign materials. Different sizes of fine or coarse aggregate shall be stored in
separate stock piles sufficiently removed from each other to prevent inter mixing the
materials at edges of the pipes.
9. The water for mixing shall be potable water to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-
charge. The quantity of water shall be just sufficient to produce a dense concrete of
required workability for the job.
10. For all work, concrete shall be mixed in a mechanical mixer along with other
accessories shall be -kept in first class working condition and so maintained
throughout the construction. Mixing shall be continued till materials are uniformly
distributed and an uniform colour of the entire mass is obtained and each individual
particles of the coarse aggregate shows complete coating of mortar containing its
proportionate amount of cement. In no case shall the mixing be done for less than 2
minutes after all ingredients have been put into the mixer.
11. When hand mixing is permitted by the Engineer-in-charge for small jobs or for certain
other reasons, it shall be done on a smooth watertight platform large enough to allow
efficient turning over of the ingredients of concrete' before and after adding water.
Mixing platform shall be so arranged that no foreign material shall get mixed with
concrete nor does the mixing water flow out. Cement in required number of bags
shall be placed in a uniform layer on top of the measured quantity of fine and coarse
aggregate. Which shall also be spread in a layer of uniform thickness on the mixing
platform. Dry coarse and fine aggregate and cement. Then shall be mixed thoroughly
by turning over to mass turned over till a mix of required consistency is obtained. In
hand mixing quantity of cement shall be increased by 10 percent above that
specified.
12. Mixers which have been out of use for more than 30 minutes shall be thoroughly
cleaned before putting in a new batch. Unless otherwise agreed to by the Engineer-
in-charge the first batch of concrete from the mixer shall contain only two third of
normal quantity of course aggregate. Mixing plants shall be thoroughly cleaned
before changing from one type of cement to another.
13. The method of transporting and placing concrete shall be approved by the
Engineer-in-charge Concrete shall be so transported and placed that no
contamination, segregation or loss of its constituent material takes place. All form
work and reinforcement contained in it shall be cleaned and made free from standing
water, dust snow or ice immediately before placing of concrete. No concrete shall be
placed in any part of the structure until the approval of the Engineer-in-charge has
been obtained.
14. If concreting is not started with 24 hours of the approval being given, it shall have to
be obtained again from the Engineer-in-charge. Concreting then shall proceed
continuously over the area between construction joints. Fresh concrete shall not be
placed against concrete which has been in position for more than 30 minutes unless
a proper construction joint is formed. Concrete shall be compacted in its final position
within 30 minutes of its discharge from the mixer unless carried in properly designed
73
agitators, operating continuously, when this time shall be within 2 hours of the
addition of cement to the mix and within 30 minutes of its discharge from the agitator.
Except where otherwise agreed to by the Engineer-in-charge, concrete shall be
disposed in horizontal layer to a compacted depth of not more than 0.45 metre when
internal vibrators are used and not exceeding 0.30 metre in all other cases.
15. Unless otherwise agreed to by the Engineer-in-charge, concrete shall not be dropped
into piece from a height exceeding 2 metres. When trucking or chutes are used they
shall be kept clean and used in such way as to avoid segregation. When concreting
has to be resumed on a surface which has hardened, it shall be roughened, swept
clean, thoroughly wetted, and cleaned with a 13mm.thick layer of mortar composed
of cement and sand in the same ratio as in the concrete mix itself. This 13 mm. layer
of mortar shall be freshly mixed and placed immediately before placing of new
concrete. Where concrete has not fully hardened, all laitance shall be removed by
scrubbing the new surface with wire or bristle brushed. Care being taken to avoid
dislodgement of particulars of coarse aggregate. The surface shall then be
thoroughly wetted, all free water removed and then coated with neat cement grout.
The first layer of concrete to be placed on this surface shall not exceed 150 mm. in
thickness, and shall be well rammed against old work particular attention being given
to corner and close spots.
16. All concrete shall be compacted to produce a dense homogeneous mass with the
assistance of. Vibrators, unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer-in-charge for
exceptional cases, such as concreting under water, where vibrator cannot be used.
Sufficient vibrators in serviceable condition shall be kept at site so that spare
equipments are always available in the event of break downs.
17. Immediately after compaction, concrete shall be protected against harmful effects of
weather, including rain, running water, shocks, vibrations due to traffic, rapid
temperature changes, fast drying put process. It shall be covered with wet sacking
Hessian or other similar absorbent material approved by the Engineer-in-charge soon
after the initial set. It shall be kept continuously wet for a period of not less than 14
days from the date of placement. Masonry work over the foundation concrete may be
started after 48 hours of it‟s laying but the curing of concrete shall be continued for a
minimum period of 14 days.
18. Form work shall include all temporary or permanent forms required for forming the
concrete, together with all temporary construction required for their support. Forms
for concrete shall be constructed of metal or timber suitably lined and be of
substantial and rigid construction true to shape and dimensions shown on the
drawings. Where metal forms are used, all bolts and rivets shall be counter sunk and
well ground to provide a smooth, plain surface. Where timber is used it shall be well
seasoned, free from loose knots, projecting nails, splits or other defects that may
mark the cement surface of concrete. For exposed concrete faces, timber for
shuttering shall be wrought on all faces in contact with concrete.
19. Forms shall be mortar tight and shall be made sufficiently rigid by the use of ties and
bracings to prevent any displacement or sagging between supports. They shall be
strong enough to withstand all pressure, ramming and vibration, without deflection
from the prescribed lines occurring during and after placing the concrete. Screw jacks
or hardwood wedges where required shall be provided to make up any settlement in
the form work either before or during the placing of concrete. Suitable camber shall
be provided in horizontal members of surface specially in long spans to counteract
the effects of any deflection. The frame work shall be so fixed as to provide for such
74
camber. Forms shall be so constructed as to be removable in sections in the desired
sequence, without damaging the surface of concrete or disturbing other sections.
Unless otherwise specified or directed. Chamfers or fillets of size 25 mm x 25 mm
shall be provided at all angles of frame work to avoid sharp corners.
20. The inside surface of forms shall, except in the case of permanent form work or
where otherwise agreed to by the Engineer-in-charge, be coated with an approved
material to prevent adhesion of concrete to the form work. Release agents shall be
applied strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and shall not be
allowed to come into contact with any reinforcement of prestressing tendons and
anchorage. Different release agents shall not be used in form work of concrete which
will be visible in the finished works. Special measures shall be taken to ensure that
the frame work does not hinder the shrinkage of concrete because without these
cracking could occur before the form work is removed. Where applicable
arrangements must be made to ensure that the form does not restrain the shortening
and hogging of the beams of slabs during tensioning of the tendons. The formwork
should take due account of the calculated amount at positive or negative camber so
as to ensure the correct final shape of the structures having regard to the
deformation of false work, scaffolding or propping and the instantaneous
deformation due to various causes affecting prestessed structures. Where there are
re-entrant angles in the concrete sections, the formwork should be removed at these
sections as soon as possible after the concrete has set in order to avoid cracking due
to shrinking of concrete. Formwork shall be tight enough to prevent any appreciable
loss of cement during vibrations. Suitable tolerances should be provided in the
formwork, immediately before concreting all forms shall be thoroughly cleaned.
Contractor shall give the Engineer-in-charge due. Notice before placing any concrete
in the forms to permit him to inspect and accept the false work and forms as to their
strength alignment and general fitness, but such inspection shall not relieve the
contractor of his responsibility for safety of machinery, materials and for results
obtained.
21. The Engineer-in-charge shall be informed in advance by the contractor of his

intention to strike any formwork. While fixing the time for removal of formworks, due
consideration shall be given to local conditions, character of the structure, the
weather and other conditions that influence the setting of concrete the removal of the
load supporting or so fit forms may commence when concrete has attained strength
and of the materials used in the ix. Where field operations are controlled by the
strength test of concrete, the removal of the load supporting or so fit forms may
commence when concrete has attained strength equal to at least twice the stress to
which the concrete will be subject at the time of striking props including the effect of
any further addition of loads, When field operations are not controlled by strength
tests of concrete the vertical forms of beams, columns and walls may be removed
after 2 days. The props of slabs and beams may be removed after 14 and 21 days
respectively. All form work shall be removed without causing any damage to the
concrete Centering shall be gradually and uniformly lowered in such a manner as to
avoid any stock or vibrations. Supports shall be removed in such a manner as to
permit the contract the concrete to take stresses due to its own weight uniformly and
gradually. Where internal metal ties are permitted they or their removable parts shall
be extracted without causing any damage to the concrete and remaining holes filled
with mortars. No permanently embedded metal part shall have less than 25 mm.
cover to the finished concrete surface. Where it is intended to reuse the formwork it
shall be cleaned and made good to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-charge.
75
22. Immediately after the removal of forms, all exposed bars or bolts passing through the
Cement Concrete member and used for shuttering or any other purpose shall be cut
inside the Cement Concrete member to a depth of at least 25 mm. below the surface
of the concrete and the resulting holes filled by cement mortar. All fins cause by form
joints, all cavities produced by the removal of form ties and all other holes and
depressions, honeycomb spots, broken edges or corners and other defects, shall be
thoroughly cleaned, saturated with water and carefully pointed and rendered true with
mortar of cement and fine aggregate mixed in the proportions used in the grade of
concrete that is being finished and of as dry a consistency as is possible to use.
Considerable pressure shall be applied in filling and pointing to ensure thorough
filling in all voids. Surface which has been pointed shall be kept moist for a period of
24 hours. If rock, pockets/honeycombs, in the opinion of the Engineer-in-charge are
of such an extent of and character as to affect structure materially or to endanger the
life of the strength or the steel reinforcement, he may declare the concrete defective
and require the removal and replacement of the portions of the structure affected.
Joint shall be filled up with bitumen as directed by Engineer-in-charge in case of C.C.
wearing surface.
23. The unit rate for concrete shall include the cost of all materials, labour, tools and
plants required for mixing, placing in positions, vibrating and compacting, finishing as
per directions of the Engineer-in-charge, curing and all other incidental expenses for
producing concrete of specified strength to complete the structure or its components
as shown in the drawings and according to these specifications. The rate shall also
include the cost or making, fixing and removing of all centering and forms required for
the work centering.
24. The payment will be made on cmt Basis of the finished work.
ITEM NO: 4
Providing and casting in situ controlled cement concrete M.250 for R.C.C. work raft
cut off walls as per drawing including centering shuttering where necessary laying
vibrating curing and finishing complete including curing with all machineries,
additives if required manpower, vibrators, tools & tackles etc. as per detailed
specification.
(A) Raft
1. The relevant specifications of R.C.C work under Para 3.0 for plain, reinforced cement
concrete shall apply to this.
2. The measurement shall be in Cu.mt.
3. The rate includes cost of required materials, plants, labour, centering, shuttering,
scaffolding, and curing etc. to complete the item.
ITEM NO: 5
Providing and casting in situ controlled cement concrete M.250 for R.C.C. work in
piers abutment and R.C.C. return as per drawing including centering shuttering
scaffolding where necessary laying vibrating curing and finishing complete as per
detailed specification, cost inclusive of all machineries, tools, tackles, vibrators and
mix design to be approved by consultant/client.
76
(A) R.C.C. returns
scaffolding, ramming, vibrating, curing and finishing etc. to complete the item.
ITEM NO: 6
Providing and casting in situ controlled cement concrete M. 250 for R.C.C. Work in
superstructure including centering shuttering scaffolding ramming vibrating curing
and finishing complete. as per detailed specification, cost inclusive of all machineries,
tools, tackles, vibrators and mix design to be approved by consultant/client
(B) Balanced Cantilever box type super structure

(I) Top slabs
(II) Column
scaffolding, ramming, vibrating, curing and finishing etc. to complete the item.
ITEM NO: 7
Providing Thermo Mechanically Treated bars(TMT bars) FE - 415 for R.C.C. work
including cutting, bending, binding, hooking, tying and placing in position as per
detailed drawings and specification incl. cost of binding wire etc. complete at all
levels. For chairs separate measurement will be taken and paid. Make shall be
material D.
1. The relevant portion pertaining to specifications of reinforcement under Para 3.0

specifications for plain, reinforced cement concrete shall apply to this.
2. The measurement shall be in Kg.
3. The rate includes cost of required materials, plants, labour, fabrication, placing in
position etc. to complete the item.
ITEM NO: 8
Providing and laying filter media 600 mm. Thick as directed at the back of abutments
returns and wing walls as per detailed specifications.
1. Well graded pebbles or metal of 40 mm to 63 mm size shall be used. The grading
and tolerance of metal of pebbles should be as under.
Sr.No No. of Size range Sieve designation Percentage by weight

passing through the sieve
11 63 mm to 40 mm 90 mm 100-50
63 mm 85-100
50 mm 35-70
40 mm 00-15
20 mm 00-05
77
The size shall be 40 mm to 63 mm where in tolerance limit for oversize shall be upto
15% and that for lower size should be upto 15% and below 20 mm it shall be tightly
placed to a thickness not less allowable upto 5% the filter material than 600 mm and
provided over the entire surface behind abutments wings or return walls to the full
height.
2. The measurement for payment shall be made on sq.mtr. basis.
3. The unit rate included to the cost of materials, scaffolding, labour and tools to
complete the work.
ITEM NO: 9
Providing G.I. 100 mm. Diameter water spouts including necessary iron gratings as
per drawings and detailed specification.
1. Material for the water spout shall be as mentioned in the item and shall be got
approved from the Engineer in charge.
2. Water spout shall be 100 mm internal diameter. Cast iron grating shall be provided at
the entry and shall be fixed in the recess so as to be flush with the road surface as
per drawing enclosed. The quality and size of grating shall be got approved from the
Engineer in charge. The water spouts shall be interconnected & shall be rigidly fixed
in concrete member. The grating shall be painted with two coats of anti corrosive
black bitumen paint.
3. Measurement shall be per No of water spout fixed.
4. Unit rate includes cost of all materials, labour & tools to complete the work.
ITEM NO: 10
Providing and casting situ controlled cement concrete M.150 for average 75mm thick
wearing coat laid as directed including tamping vibrating finishing curing centering
and shuttering if required and filling in joints with bitumen complete as per detailed
specification..
1. The wearing coat shall consist of 75 mm RCC M-150.
2. In preparations of mix specifications given under relevant specification of 3.0 of this

documents, shall be followed It shall be as per IS-1195 & IS 1196.
3. The measurement shall be in Cu.mt
4. The Contract unit rate shall include full compensation for furnishing all labour,
materials, tools, equipment and incidental costs necessary for doing all the work in all
respects as per these Specifications.
ITEM NO: 11
Providing 20 mm thick pre moulded asphalt filler joint as per drawings and detail
specification.
1. Open joints shall be constructed at the locations as directed by the Engineer -in-
charge using a wood strip, metal plate, other suitable material which is
subsequently removed. When removing the material, care shall be exercised to
avoid chipping or breaking the corners of the concrete. The edge of the concrete
78
at the joints shall be edge finished. Reinforcement shall not extend across as
open joint.
2. When performed filler is to be provided the filler shall be placed in correct position
before concrete is placed against the filler. The filler material shall form part of the
joint and while, concreting the slab, care shall be taken to prevent the former from,
bring displaced. After the work is completed, the exposed face of the joint shall be
cleaned of all loose material sticking to it.
3. The material used for filling expansion joint shall be bitumen impregnated felt which
shall conform to the requirements of IS: 1838, and shall be got approved from the
Engineer-in-charge.
4. The expansion joint shall be measured in square meters. Thickness of the expansion
joint will be 20 to 25 mm. Width of expansion joint shall be equal to full depth of the
slab.
5. The rate shall include the cost of all materials, labour, equipments incidental
charges for fixing the joints complete in all respects as per these specifications and
as shown on the drawings.
ITEM NO: 12
Providing parapet of control cement concrete M200 as per detailed drawing with
necessary reinforcement including shuttering, laying, vibrating and finishing to line
and level complete as per detailed specification.
(i) Cast in situ
2. The measurement shall be in R.mt.
scaffolding, and curing etc. to complete the item.
ITEM NO: 13
Providing and applying 2 coat of polymer to be applied on construction joint before

half an hour of new concrete as per detailed drawings and detailed specification by
Engineer and as per site requirements.
1.0 Scope
This work shall consist of applying 2 coat of polymer on construction joint before half an
hour of new concrete per detailed drawings and instructed by Engineer-in-charge.
2.0 Material
Polymer (HACK-AID-PLAST of sunanda speciality coating pvt. ltd or ROFF bond

repair of Roff , Protect Bond EP or bonding agent of any other approved brand)
3.0 Construction Procedure
 Clean the surface thoroughly to remove loose material of old concrete etc and
moisten with water.
79
 Mix one liter of polymer of approved brand with 500 ml of water. Stir uniformly to
attain uniform consistency. Apply uniformly one coat on cleaned old concrete surface
by brush.
 Application of second coat after five minutes.
 Mixture of one liter shall be used in 10 M2 area.
 Application of polymer must be within half an hour otherwise surface should be
moisten with water.
 In any case the concrete shall be poured within one hour.
4.0 Mode of Measurement

The measurement shall be in sq.mt.
5.0 Rate
The rate includes cost of required materials, plants, labour, placing as per drawing etc. to
complete the item.
ITEM NO: 14
Providing and laying for dry stone pitching of 22.5 cm thick including preparing the
surface etc. comp. by compacting etc complete as per detailed specification.
1. The work shall consist of covering the slopes of guide banks, training works and road
embankment with stone or boulders, over a layer of moorum bedding.
2. Stone subject to marked deterioration by water or weather will not be accepted. The
stone shall be sound, hard, durable and fairly regular in shape and its thickness in
any one direction shall not be less than the thickness of pitching as specified in the
item and thickness of the stone at any place shall not be less by 15% of the thickness
specified. The largest stones procurable shall be supplied on site. The sizes of spalls
shall be minimum 25mm and shall be suitable to fill the voids in the pitching.
Thickness of the pitching shall be as specified in the pitching item. (
G.C.No.SSR/2080 IB 547/28/C, dated 6th March, 1982)
3. Before laying the pitching, the sides of banks shall be trimmed to the required slope
and profiles put up by means of line and pegs at intervals of 3 meters of ensure
regular straight work and uniform slope throughout. Depressions shall be filled and
thoroughly compacted.
4. Moorum for bedding shall be laid over the prepared base and suitably compacted to
a thickness 150mm Quality of moorum will be as per its relevant specifications.
5. The stone pitching shall commence in a trench below the toe of the slope. Stone
shall be placed by derrick or by hand to the required length, thickness and depth
conforming to the drawing. Stones shall be set normal to the slope and slope and
placed so that the largest dimensions is perpendicular to the face of the slope, unless
such dimensions are greater than the specified thickness of pitching. The largest
stones shall be placed in the bottom courses and for use as headers for subsequent
course. When full depth of pitching can be formed with a single stone, the stones
shall be laid breaking joints and all interstices between adjacent stones shall be filled
in with spalls of the proper size and wedged in with hammers to ensure tight packing.
Pitching shall be done in panels as specify in drawing.
6. Payment shall be made on Cubic Meter basis of the-finished work. If directed by the
Engineer-in-charge, for measurement the materials may have to be stacked at site
80
before laying and nothing extra will be paid to the Contractor for this stacking.
Preparation of base for laying bedding shall be deemed indicated to the work.
7. The rate shall include the cost of preparing the base, putting to the profiles, providing,
laying and compacting the moorum bedding and stone pitching of dry rubble as per
embankment slopes to specified thickness, lines, curves, slopes levels and all labour
and materials as well as tools and plant required of the work.
ITEM NO: 15
Providing Panel wall for dry stone pitching in uncoursed rubble masonry with hard
stone of approved quality in cement mortar 1:5 including curing etc. complete. as per
detailed specification.
1. Stone shall be hard, sound, free from cracks, decay and weathering and shall be
freshly quarried from an approved quarry. Stone with round surface shall not be
used. The stones when immersed in water for 24 hours shall not absorb water by
more than 5 percent of their dry weight when tested in accordance with IS : 1124.
The length of stone shall not exceed three times its height and the breadth on base
shall not be greater than three fourths of the thickness of wail nor less than 15 cm.
2. Cement and sand shall be mixed in proportion as specified in the item. Cement and
sand shall be proportioned by volume after making due allowance for bulking. The
required quantity of water shall then be added and the mortar mixed to produce
workable consistency.
3. The mixing shall be done intimately. The operation shall be carried out on a clean
water tight platform, and cement and sand shall be first mixed dry in the required
proportion to obtain as uniform colour and then the mortar shall be mixed for at least
two minutes after addition of "water. In case of cement mortar, that has stiffened
because of evaporation of water the same shall be retempered by adding water as
frequently as needed to restore the requisite consistency, but this retempering shall
be permitted only, within thirty minutes from the time of addition of water at the time
of initial mixing.
4. The dressing of stone shall conform to the general requirements of dressing of stone
covered in IS: 1129. Stones shall be sufficiently wetted before laying to prevent
absorption of water from mortar The bed which is to receive the stone shall be
cleaned, wetted and covered with a layer of fresh mortar. All stones shall be laid lull
in mortar both in bed and in vertical joins and settled carefully in place with a wooden
mallet immediately on placement so that it is solidly bedded in mortar before the
same has set. Clean chips and spells shall be edges into the mortar joints and beds
wherever necessary to avoid truck beds or joints of mortar. Whenever foundation
masonry is laid directly on rock, the lace space of the first course shall be dressed to
fit into the rock snugly when pressed down in the mortar bedding over the rock. No
dry or hollow space shall be left anywhere in the masonry and each stone shall have
all the embedded faced completely covered with mortar. Vertical joints, shall be
staggered as far as possible. Sufficient transverse bond shall be provided by the use
of bond stones extending from the front to the back of the masonry. In case of thick
walls bond stones shall overlap each other in their arrangement. Bell shaped bond
stones or headers shall not be used.
5. At all angular junctions, stones at each alternate course shall be well bonded into the
respective course of the adjacent wall. All connected masonry in structure shall be
carried up at one uniform level throughout as far as possible, but when breaks are
unavoidable, the masonry shall be raked in sufficient long steps to facilitate joining or
new work with old. The stepping of taking shall not be more than 45 degree with
horizontal wing walls. Abutments and piers etc. shall be carved up truly plumb or with
the specified batter. Face work and hearting shall be brought up evenly. The top of
each course, however, shall not be levelled up by use of flat chips.
6. Stone shall be hammer dressed on the face, the sides and beds to enable it to come
in proximity with the neighboring stone. The bushing en the face shall not be more
than 4 cm on exposed face chips and spalls of stone may be used where necessary
81
to avoid thick mortar beds or joints and it shall also be ensured that no hollow spaces
are left anywhere in the masonry. The chips shall not be used below hearting stone
to bring these upto the level of face stone Use of chips shall be restricted to filling of
interstices between the adjacent stones in hearting and they shall not exceed 20
percent of the quantity of store masonry.
7. The hearting or interior filling of wall face shall consist of rubble stones not less than
15 cm. in any direction, carefully laid, hammered down with a wooden mallet into
position and solidly bedded in the mortar. The hearting should be laid nearly level
with facing and backing. Through bond stone shall be provided in masonry upto 60
cm. thickness and in case of masonry above 60 cm. thickness a set of two or more
than bond stones overlapping each other at least by 15 cm shall he provided in a line
from face to back. In case of highly absorbent types of stone (Porous lime stone and
sand stones etc.) the bond stone shall extend only about two third into the wall, as
through stone in such cases may give rise to penetration of dampness and therefore
for all thickness of such masonry a set of two or more bond stones, overlapped each
other by at least 15 cm shall be approved. One bond stone or a set of bond stones
shall be provided for every O.5O square metres of the masonry surface, bond stones
snail be stacked separately and marked to distinguish from other stones. Masonry
work shall be started alter sufficient number of bond stones are collected on site as
directed by the Engineer-in-charge.
8. The quoins shall be laid header and stretcher alternately. Every stone shall be fitted
to the adjacent stone so as to form neat and close joint. Face stone shall extend and
bond well in the back. These shall be arranged to break joints, as such as possible
and to avoid long vertical lines of joints.
9. The face joints shall not be more than 20mrn thick, but shall be sufficiently thick to
prevent stone to stone contact and shall be completely filled with mortar.
10. Green work shall be protected from rain by suitable covering. Masonry work in
cement or composite mortar shall be kept constantly wet on all faces for a minimum
period of seven day. the top of the masonry work shall be left flooded with water at
the close of the day. During hot weather all finished or partly completed work shall be
covered for wetted in such manner as will prevent rapid drying. The racking of joints
where necessary shall be done at the end of day's work when mortar is green.
11. The scaffolding shall be sound and strong to withstand all loads likely to come upon
it. The holes which provide resting space for horizontal members shall not be left in
masonry under on metre in width or immediately near the skew backs of arches. The
holes left in the masonry work for supporting the scaffolding shall be filled and made
good.
12. When fresh masonry is to be placed against existing surface of structures, these
shall be cleaned of all loose material, roughened and wetted as directed by the
Engineer-in-charge so as to effect a qood with the new work.
13. Stone masonry shall be measured cubic meters
14. The contract unit for stone masonry work shall include the cost of all labour,
materials, tools and plant Scaffolding and other expenses incidental to the
satisfactory completion of the work as described herein above.
82
ITEM NO: 16
Providing & laying weep hole in abutment and returning by using PVC pipes of 100
mm. Diameter including laying in proper grade and joining etc. comp as per detailed
specification.
1. Weep holes shall be provided in solid plain concrete/reinforced concrete,
brick/stone masonry, abutment, wing wall and return walls as shown on the
drawing or directed by the Engineer to drive moisture from the back filling. Weep
holes shall be provided with 100 mm dia PVC pipe for structures in plain/reinforced
concrete or brick masonry. Weep holes shall extend through the full width of
concrete/masonry with slope of about 1 vertical: 20 horizontal towards the draining
face.
2. The payment shall be made per R.mt of weep holes provided in structure like
abutment and returns, wing walls etc.
3. Unit rate shall be including cost of all materials, labour and equipment to complete the
job.
83
SCHEDULE-B2
ITEM NO: 1
Earth work for embankment with selected soil having CBR value not less than 7 %
and M.D.D. not less than 19.50 KN/M3 brought from approved quarry located outside
the ROW limit with all lead and lift, transporting to site, spreading in layers not more
than 25 cm (loose) by approved means, dressing, grading to required slope, watering,
rolling & compacting with the help of a vibratory roller of minimum 80 to 100 KN static
weight with plain drum in layers, whichever is suitable as per site condition to achieve
the desired density at O.M.C. including filling the depression which occur during the
process in required line, grade & slope as per "L" section & given drawing or as
directed (As Per detailed Specification attached ) incl. all taxes, royalties etc.
complete.
1.0 General
1.1 Description: These Specifications shall apply to the construction of embankments

including sub-grades, earthen shoulders and miscellaneous backfills with approved
material obtained from approved source, including material from roadway and drain
excavation, borrow pits or other sources. All embankments sub-grades, earthen
shoulders and miscellaneous backfills shall be constructed in accordance with the
requirements of these Specifications and in conformity with the lines, grades, and
cross sections shown on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
1.2 Materials and General Requirements
1.2.1 Physical requirements
1.2.1.1 The materials used in embankments, sub grades, earthen shoulders and
miscellaneous backfills shall be soil, murrum, gravel, pond ash, a mixture of these or
any other material approved by the Engineer. Such materials shall be free of logs,
stumps, roots, rubbish or any other ingredient likely to deteriorate or affect the
stability of the embankment/sub-grade. The use of pond ash as fill material shall be
mandatory in road/ flyover embankment construction in the areas where pond ash is
available in adequate quantities within economical viable lead in accordance with the
guidelines of IRC: SP: 58-2001 unless it is not considered viable by the Chief
Engineer/Engineer in Chief or any other Engineering Officer of equivalent rank.
The following types of material shall be considered unsuitable for embankment:
a) Materials from swamps, marshes and bogs;
b) Peat, log, stump and perishable material; any soil that classifies as OL, OI, OH or
Pt in accordance with IS: 1498;
c) Materials susceptible to spontaneous combustion;
d) Materials in a frozen condition;
e) Clay having liquid limit exceeding 50 and plasticity index exceeding 25; and
f) Materials with salts resulting in leaching in the embankment.
1.2.1.2 Expansive clay exhibiting marked swell and shrinkage properties (“free swelling
index” exceeding 50 percent when tested as per IS: 2720 – Part 40) shall not be
used as a fill material. Where expansive clay having “free swelling index” value less
than 50 percent is used as a fill material, sub grade and top 500 mm portion of the
embankment just below sub-grade shall be non-expansive in nature.
84
1.2.1.3 Any fill material with a soluble sulphate content exceeding 1.9 grams of sulphate
(expressed as SO3) per litre when tested in accordance with BS: 1377 Test 10, but
using a 2:1 water-soil ratio shall not be deposited within 500 mm distance (or any
other distance described in the Contract), of permanent works constructed out of
concrete, cement bound materials or other cementations material..
Materials with a total sulphate content (expressed as SO3) exceeding 0.5 percent by
mass, when tested in accordance with BS: 1377 Test 9 shall not be deposited within
500 mm, or other distances described in the Contract, of metallic items forming part
of the Permanent Works.
1.2.1.4 The size of the coarse material in the mixture of earth shall ordinarily not exceed 75
mm when placed in the embankment and 50 mm when placed in the sub grade.
However, the Engineer may at his discretion permit the use of material coarser than
this also if he is satisfied that the same will not present any difficulty as regards the
placement of fill material and its compaction to the requirements of these
Specifications. The maximum particle size in such cases, however, shall not be more
than two-thirds of the compacted layer thickness.
1.2.1.5 Ordinarily, only the materials satisfying the density requirements given in Table 1
shall be employed for the construction of the embankment and the sub-grade.
Table 1
Density Requirements of Embankment and Sub-grade Materials
Sr. Type of Work Maximum laboratory dry unit

No. weight when tested as per
IS: 2720 (Part 8)
1 Embankments up to 3 m height, not subjected Not less than 16 kN/cu.m
to extensive flooding
2 Embankments exceeding height or Not less than 17 kN/ cu.m
embankments 3 m of any height subject to
long periods of inundation
3. Sub grade and earthen shoulders/ verges/ Not less than 18 kN/cu.m
backfill
Notes:
1) This Table is not applicable for lightweight fill material, e.g., cinder, pond ash, etc.
2) The Engineer may relax these requirements at his discretion taking into account the
availability of materials for construction and other relevant factors.
3) The material to be used in sub grade should also satisfy design CBR at the dry unit
weight applicable as per Table 2
1.2.2 General requirements
1.2.2.1 The materials for embankment shall be obtained from approved sources with
preference given to acceptable materials becoming available from nearby roadway
excavation under the same Contract.
The work shall be so planned and executed that the best available materials are
saved for the sub grade and the embankment portion just below the sub grade.
1.2.2.2 Borrow materials: No borrow area shall be made available by the Employer. The
arrangement for the source of supply of the material for embankment and sub-grade
complying with the guidelines as well as compliance to environmental requirements
in respect of excavation and borrow areas as stipulated, from time to time by the
85
Ministry of Environment and Forests, Government of India and the local bodies, as
applicable shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor.
Area where pond ash is available for construction of embankment, borrowing of the
earth shall be avoided to the extent possible. Embankment constructed out of pond
ash shall be properly designed to ensure stability against uplifting etc. A suitable thick
cover may preferably be provided at intervening layers of pond ash for this purpose.
A thick soil cover shall bind the edge of the embankment to protect it against erosion.
Minimum thickness of such soil cover shall be 500 mm.
Borrow pits along the road shall be discouraged. If permitted by the Engineer, these
shall not be dug continuously. Ridges of not less than 8 m width should be left at
intervals not exceeding 300 m. Small drains shall be cut through the ridges to
facilitate drainage. The depth of the pits shall be so regulated that their bottom does
not cut an imaginary line having a slope of 1 vertical to 4 horizontal projected from
the edge of the final section of the bank, the maximum depth in any case being
limited to 1.5 m. Also, no pit shall be dug within the offset width from the toe of the
embankment required as per the consideration of stability with a minimum width of 10
m.
Haulage of material to embankments or other areas of fill shall proceed only when
sufficient spreading and compaction plant is operating at the place of deposition.
Where the excavation reveals a combination of acceptable and unacceptable
materials, the Contractor shall, unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer, carry out
the excavation in such a manner that the acceptable materials are excavated
separately for use in the permanent works without contamination by the
unacceptable materials. The acceptable materials shall be stockpiled separately.
The Contractor shall ensure that he does not adversely affect the stability of
excavation or fills by the methods of stockpiling materials, use of plants or sitting of
temporary buildings or structures.
The Contractor shall obtain representative samples from each of the identified borrow
areas and have these tested at the site laboratory following a testing programme
approved by the Engineer. It shall be ensured that the sub grade material when
compacted to the density requirements as in Table 2 shall yield the design CBR
value of the sub-grade.
Table 2
Compaction Requirements for Embankment and Sub-grade
Type of work/material Relative compaction as Minimum CBR %
percentage of max.
laboratory dry density as
per IS:2720 (Part 8)
1. Sub grade and earthen Not less than 98% 5
shoulders
2. Embankment Not less than 97% 7
3. Expansive Clays
a) Sub grade and 500 mm Not allowed -
portion just below the
sub-grade
b) Remaining portion of Not less than 90% 4
embankment
86
In case the sub-grade CBR is less than the specified in the Table 2, the sub grade
shall be stabilized with lime, cement or any other stabilizer accredited by IRC or by
mechanical stabilization so as to raise the (Field) CBR is not less than15 percent.
The Contractor shall at least 7 working days before commencement of compaction
submit the following to the Engineer for approval:
i) The values of maximum dry density and optimum moisture content obtained in
accordance with IS: 2720 (Part 8), appropriate for each of the fill materials he
intends to use.
ii) A graph of density plotted against moisture content from which each of the
values in (i) above of maximum dry density and optimum moisture content were
determined. Once the above information has been approved by the Engineer, it
shall form the basis for compaction.
1.3 Construction Operations
1.3.1 Setting out: After the site has been cleared, the work shall be set out. The limits of
embankment/sub-grade shall be marked by fixing batter pegs on both sides at regular
intervals as guides before commencing the earthwork. The embankment/sub-grade
shall be built sufficiently wider than the design dimension so that surplus material may
be trimmed, ensuring that the remaining material is to the desired density and in
position specified and conforms to the specified side slopes.
1.3.2 Dewatering: If the foundation of the embankment is in an area with stagnant

water, and in the opinion of the Engineer it is feasible to remove it, the same shall be
removed by bailing out or pumping, as directed by the Engineer and the area of the
embankment foundation shall be kept dry. Care shall be taken to discharge the
drained water so as not to cause damage to the works, crops or any other property.
Due to any negligence on the part of the Contractor, if any such damage is caused, it
shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor to repair/restore it to original condition
or compensate the damage at his own cost. If the embankment is to be constructed
under water, Clause 305.4.6 of MORT&H shall apply.
1.3.3 Stripping and storing topsoil: In localities where most of the available embankment
materials are not conducive to plant growth, or when so directed by the Engineer, the
topsoil from all areas of cutting and from all areas to be covered by embankment
foundation shall be stripped to specified depths not less than 150 mm and stored in
stockpiles of height not exceeding 2 m for covering embankment slopes, cut slopes
and other disturbed areas where re-vegetation is desired. Topsoil shall not be
unnecessarily trafficked either before stripping or when in a stockpile. Stockpiles shall
not be surcharged or otherwise loaded and multiple handling shall be kept to a
minimum.
1.3.4 Compacting ground supporting embankment/sub-grade: Where necessary, the

original ground shall be leveled to facilitate placement of first layer of embankment,
scarified, mixed with water and then compacted by rolling in accordance with Clauses
1.3.5 and 1.3.6 so as to achieve minimum dry density as given in Table 2.
In case where the difference between the sub-grade level (top of the sub-grade on
which pavement rests) and ground level is less than 0.5 m and the ground does not
have 98 percent relative compaction with respect to the dry density (as given in Table
2), the ground shall be loosened upto a level 0.5 m below the sub-grade level,
watered and compacted in layers in accordance with Clauses 1.3.5 and 1.3.6 to
achieve dry density not less than 98 percent relative compaction as given in Table 2.
Where so directed by the Engineer, any unsuitable material occurring in the
87
embankment foundation (500 mm portion just below the sub-grade) shall be removed,
suitably disposed and replaced by approved materials laid in layers to the required
degree of compaction.
Any foundation treatment specified for embankments especially high embankments,

resting on suspect foundations as revealed by borehole logs shall be carried out in a
manner and to the depth as desired by the Engineer. Where the ground on which an
embankment is to be built has any of such material types (a) to (f) in Clause 1.2.1.1 at
least 500 mm of such material must be removed and replaced by acceptable fill
material before embankment construction commences.
1.3.5 Spreading material in layers and bringing to appropriate moisture content
1.3.5.1 The embankment and sub-grade material shall be spread in layers of uniform
thickness not exceeding 250 mm compacted thickness over the entire width of
embankment by mechanical means, finished by a motor grader and compacted as per
Clause 1.3.6.
The motor grader blade shall have hydraulic control suitable for initial adjustment and
maintain the same so as to achieve the specific slope and grade. Successive layers
shall not be placed until the layer under construction has been thoroughly compacted
to the specified requirements as in Table 2 and got approved by the Engineer. Each
compacted layer shall be finished parallel to the final cross-section of the
embankment.
1.3.5.2 Moisture content of the material shall be checked at the site of placement prior to
commencement of compaction; if found to be out of agreed limits, the same shall be
made good. Where water is required to be added in such constructions, water shall be
sprinkled from a water tanker fitted with sprinkler capable of applying water uniformly
with a controllable rate of flow to variable widths of surface but without any flooding.
The water shall be added uniformly and thoroughly mixed in soil by blading, discing or
harrowing until a uniform moisture content is obtained throughout the depth of the
layer.
If the material delivered to the road bed is too wet, it shall be dried, by aeration and
exposure to the sun, till the moisture content is acceptable for compaction. Should
circumstances arise, where owing to wet weather, the moisture content cannot be
reduced to the required amount by the above procedure, compaction work shall be
suspended. Moisture content of each layer of soil shall be checked in accordance with
IS: 2720 (Part 2), and unless otherwise mentioned, shall be so adjusted, making due
allowance for evaporation losses, that at the time of compaction it is in the range of 1
percent above to 2 percent below the optimum moisture content determined in
accordance with IS: 2720 (Part 8) as the case may be. Expansive clays shall,
however, be compacted at moisture content corresponding to the specified dry
density, but on the wet side of the optimum moisture content obtained from the
laboratory compaction curve.
After adding the required amount of water, the soil shall be processed by means of
graders, harrows, rotary mixers or as otherwise approved by the Engineer until the
layer is uniformly wet. Clods or hard lumps of earth shall be broken to have a
maximum size of 75 mm when being placed in the embankment and a maximum size
of 50 mm when being placed in the sub-grade.
88
1.3.5.3 Embankment and other areas of fill shall, unless otherwise required in the Contract
or permitted by the Engineer, be constructed evenly over their full width and their
fullest possible extent and the Contractor shall control and direct construction plant
traffic shall be made good by the Contractor with material and other vehicular traffic
uniformly over them. Damage by construction plant and other having the same
characteristics and strength as the material had before it was damaged.
Embankments and other areas of unsupported fills shall not be constructed with
steeper side slopes, or to greater widths than those shown in the Contract, except to
permit adequate compaction at the edges before trimming back, or to obtain the final
profile following any settlement of the fill and the underlying material, Whenever fill is
to be deposited against the face of a natural slope, or sloping earthworks face
including embankments, cuttings, other fills and excavations steeper than 1 vertical to
4 horizontal, such faces shall be benched as per Clause 1.4.1 immediately before
placing the subsequent fill.
All permanent faces of side slopes of embankments and other areas of fill shall,
subsequent to any trimming operations, be reworked and sealed to the satisfaction of
the Engineer by tracking a tracked vehicle, considered suitable by the Engineer, on
the slope or any other method approved by the Engineer.
1.3.6 Compaction: Only the compaction equipment approved by the Engineer shall be
employed to compact the different material types encountered during construction.
Static three wheel roller, self propelled single drum vibratory roller, vibratory tandem
roller, pneumatic tyred, pad foot rollers, etc., of suitable size and capacity as approved
by the Engineer shall be used for the different types and grades of materials required
to be compacted either individually or in suitable combinations.
The compaction shall be done with the help of self-propelled single drum vibratory
roller or pad foot vibratory roller of 80 to 100 kN static weight or heavy pneumatic tyre
roller of adequate capacity capable of achieving required compaction with nine wheels
and 200 to 300 kN weight with minimum tyre pressure of 0.7 MPa. The Contractor
shall demonstrate the efficacy of the equipment he intends to use by carrying out
compaction trials. The procedure to be adopted for these site trials shall first be
submitted to the Engineer for approval.
Earthmoving plant shall not be accepted as compaction equipment nor shall the use
of a lighter category of plant to provide any preliminary compaction to assist the use of
heavier plant be taken into account.
Each layer of the material shall be thoroughly compacted to the densities specified in
Table 2. Subsequent layers shall be placed only after the finished layer has been
tested according to Clause 903.2.2 of MORT&H and accepted by the Engineer. The
Engineer may permit measurement of field dry density by a nuclear moisture/density
gauge used in accordance with agreed procedure and the gauge is calibrated to
provide results identical to that obtained from tests in accordance with IS:2720 (Part
28). A record of the same shall be maintained by the Contractor.
When density measurements reveal any soft areas in the embankment/sub-

grade/earthen shoulders, further compaction shall be carried out as directed by the
Engineer. If in spite of that the specified compaction is not achieved, the material in
the soft areas shall be removed and replaced by approved material, compacted using
appropriate mechanical means such as light weight vibratory roller, double drum walk
89
behind roller, vibratory plate compactor, trench compactor or vibratory tamper to the
density requirements and satisfaction of the Engineer.
1.3.7 Drainage: The surface of the embankment/sub-grade at all times during construction
shall be maintained at such a cross fall (not flatter than that required for effective
drainage of an earthen surface) as will shed water and prevent ponding.
1.3.8 Repairing of damages caused by rain/spillage of water: The soil in the affected
portion shall be removed in such areas as directed by the Engineer before next layer
is laid and refilled in layers and compacted using appropriate mechanical means such
as small vibratory roller, plate compactor or power rammer to achieve the required
density in accordance with Clause 1.3.6. If the cut is not sufficiently wide for use of
required mechanical means for compaction, the same shall be widened suitably to
permit their use for proper compaction. Tests shall be carried out as directed by the
Engineer to ascertain the density requirements of the repaired area. The work of
repairing the damages including widening of the cut, if any, shall be carried out by the
Contractor at his own cost, including the arranging of machinery/equipment for the
purpose.
1.3.9 Finishing operations: Finishing operations shall include the work of shaping and
dressing the shoulders/verge/roadbed and side slopes to conform to the alignment,
levels, cross-sections and dimensions shown on the drawings or as directed by the
Engineer subject to the surface tolerance described in Clause 902 of MORT&H
specification. Both the upper and lower ends of the side slopes shall be rounded off to
improve appearance and to merge the embankment with the adjacent terrain.
The topsoil, removed and conserved earlier (Clause 1.3.3) shall be spread over the fill
slopes as per directions of the Engineer to facilitate the growth of vegetation. Slopes
shall be roughened and moistened slightly prior to the application of the topsoil in
order to provide satisfactory bond. The depth of the topsoil shall be sufficient to
sustain plant growth, the usual thickness being from 75 mm to 150 mm.
Where directed, the slopes shall be turfed with sods in accordance with Clause 307 of
MORT&H specification. If seeding and mulching of slopes is prescribed, this shall be
done to the requirements of Clause 308 of MORT&H specification.
When earthwork operations have been substantially completed, the road area shall be
cleared of all debris, and ugly scars in the construction area responsible for
objectionable appearance eliminated.
1.4 Construction of Embankment and Sub grade under Special Conditions
1.4.1 Earthwork for widening existing road embankment: When an existing

embankment and/or sub-grade is to be widened and its slopes are steeper than 1
vertical on 4 horizontal, continuous horizontal benches, each at least 300 mm wide,
shall be cut into the old slope for ensuring adequate bond with the fresh
embankment/sub-grade material to be added. The material obtained from cutting of
benches could be utilized in the widening of the embankment / sub grade. However,
when the existing slope against which the fresh material is to be placed is flatter than
1 vertical on 4 horizontal, the slope surface may only be ploughed or scarified instead
of resorting to benching.
1.4.2 Where the width of the widened portions is insufficient to permit the use of
conventional rollers, compaction shall be carried out with the help of light weight
vibratory roller, double drum walk behind roller, vibratory plate compactor or vibratory
90
tamper or any other appropriate equipment approved by the Engineer. End dumping
of material from trucks for widening operations shall be avoided except in difficult
circumstances when the extra width is too narrow to permit the movement of any
other types of hauling equipment.
1.4.2 Earthwork for embankment and sub-grade to be placed against sloping

ground: Where an embankment/sub grade is to be placed against sloping ground,
the latter shall be appropriately benched or ploughed/scarified as required in Clause
1.4.1 before placing the embankment/sub-grade material. Extra earthwork involved in
benching or due to ploughing/scarifying etc. shall be considered incidental to the
work.
For wet conditions, benches with slightly inward fall and subsoil drains at the lowest
point shall be provided as per the drawings, before the fill is placed against sloping
ground.
Where the Contract requires construction of transverse subsurface drain at the cut-fill
interface, work on the same shall be carried out to Clause 309 of MORT&H
specification in proper sequence with the embankment and sub-grade work as
approved by the Engineer.
1.4.3 Earthwork over existing road surface: Where the embankment is to be placed
over an existing road surface, the work shall be carried out as indicated below:
i. If the existing road surface is of granular type and lies within 1 m of the new sub-
grade level. The existing granular base/sub-base, as the case, may be, shall be
scarified to a depth of 50 mm or as directed so as to provide ample bond between
the old and new material ensuring that at least 500 mm portion below the top of new
sub-grade level is compacted to the desired density;
ii. If the existing road surface is of bituminous type and lies within 1 m of the new sub-
grade level, the bituminous layer shall be removed completely, so as to avoid
presence of impermeable layer beneath the new thin earthen layer and also provide
ample bond between the old and new material ensuring that at least 500 mm portion
below the top of new sub grade level is compacted to the desired density;
iii. If the existing road surface is of cement concrete type and lies within 1 m of the new
sub-grade level, the same shall be removed completely;
iv. If the level difference between the existing road surface and the new formation level
is more than 1 m, the existing surface shall be permitted to stay in place without any
modification.
1.4.4 Embankment and sub grade around structures: To avoid interference with the
construction of abutments, wing walls or return walls of culvert/bridge structures, the
Contractor shall, at points to be determined by the Engineer suspend work on
embankment forming approaches to such structures, until such time as the
construction of the latter is sufficiently advanced to permit the completion of
approaches without the risk of damage to the structure.
Unless directed otherwise, the filling around culverts, bridges and other structures
upto a distance of twice the height of the road from the back of the abutment shall be
carried out independent of the work on the main embankment. The fill material shall
not be placed against any abutment or wing wall, unless permission has been given
by the Engineer but in any case not until the concrete or masonry has been in
position for 14 days. The embankment and sub-grade shall be brought up
simultaneously in equal layers on each side of the structure to avoid displacement
91
and unequal pressure. The sequence of work in this regard shall be got approved
from the Engineer.
The material used for backfill shall not be an organic soil or highly plastic clay having
plasticity index and liquid limit more than 20 and 40 respectively when tested
according to IS:2720 (Part 5). Filling behind abutments and wing walls for all
structures shall conform to the general guidelines given in Appendix-6 of IRC:78
(Standard Specifications and Code of Practice for Road Bridges-Section VII) in
respect of the type of material, the extent of backfill, its laying and compaction etc.
The fill material shall be deposited in horizontal layers in loose thickness and
compacted thoroughly to the requirements of Table 2.
Where the provision of any filter medium is specified behind the abutment, the same
shall be laid in layers simultaneously with the laying of fill material. The material used
for filter shall conform to the requirements for filter medium spelt out in Clause
2502/309.3.2 (B) of MORT&H specification unless otherwise specified in the
Contract.
Where it may be impracticable to use conventional rollers, the compaction shall be

carried out by appropriate mechanical means such as small vibratory roller, plate
compactor or power rammer. Care shall be taken to see that the compaction
equipment does not hit or come too close to any structural member so as to cause
any damage to them or excessive pressure against the structure.
1.4.5 Construction of embankment over ground incapable of supporting

construction equipment: Where embankment is to be constructed across ground
which will not support the weight of repeated heavy loads of construction equipment,
the first layer of the fill may be constructed by placing successive loads of material in
a uniformly distributed layer of a minimum thickness required to support the
construction equipment as permitted by the Engineer. The Contractor, if so desired
by him, may also use suitable geo synthetic material to increase the bearing capacity
of the foundation. This exception to normal procedure will not be permitted where, in
the opinion of the Engineer, the embankments could be constructed in the approved
manner over such ground by the use of lighter or modified equipment after proper
ditching and drainage have been provided.
Where this exception is permitted, the selection of the material and the construction
procedure to obtain an acceptable layer shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
The cost of providing suitable traffic conditions for construction equipment over any
area of the Contract will be the responsibility of the Contractor and no extra payment
will be made to him. The remainder of the embankment shall be constructed as
specified in Clause 1.3.
1.4.6 Embankment construction under water: Where filling or backfilling is to be placed

under water, only acceptable granular material or rock shall be used unless
otherwise approved by the Engineer. Acceptable granular material shall be of GW,
SW, GP, SP as per IS: 1498 and consist of graded, hard durable particles with
maximum particle size not exceeding 75 mm. The material should be non-plastic
having uniformity coefficient of not less than 10. The material placed in open water
shall be deposited by end tipping without compaction.
Coarse sand blanket layer in accordance with the provision of IRC:34 shall be made
for construction of embankment in water logged and marshy areas.
92
1.4.7 Earthwork for high embankment: In the case of high embankments (more than 6
m), the Contractor shall normally use pond ash in conformity with Clause 1.2.1.1 or
the material from the specified borrow area. In case, he desires to use different
material for his own convenience, he shall have to carry out necessary soil
investigations and redesign the high embankment at his own cost. The Contractor
shall then furnish the soil test data and design of high embankment for approval of
the Engineer, who reserves the right to accept or reject it.
If necessary, stage construction of fills and any controlled rates of filling shall be
carried out in accordance with the Contract including installation of instruments and
its monitoring.
Where required, the Contractor shall surcharge embankments or other areas of fill
with approved material for the periods specified in the Contract. If settlement of
surcharged fill results in any surcharging material, which is unacceptable for use in
the fill being surcharged, lying below formation level, the Contractor shall remove the
unacceptable material and dispose it as per direction of the Engineer. He shall then
bring the resultant level up to formation level with acceptable material.
1.4.8. Settlement period: Where settlement period is specified in the Contract, the
embankment shall remain in place for the required settlement period before
excavating for abutment, wing wall, retaining wall, footings, etc., or driving foundation
piles. The duration of the required settlement period at each location shall be as
provided for in the Contract or as directed by the Engineer.
1.5 Plying of Traffic

Construction and other vehicular traffic shall not use the prepared surface of the
embankment and/or sub-grade without the prior permission of the Engineer. Any
damage arising out of such use shall, however, be made good by the Contractor at
his own cost as directed by the Engineer.
1.6 Surface Finish and Quality Control of Work

The surface finish of construction of sub-grade shall conform to the requirements of
Clause 902 of MORT&H specification. Control on the quality of materials and works
shall be exercised in accordance with Clause 903 of MORT&H specification.
1.7 Sub-grade Strength
1.7.1 It shall be ensured prior to actual execution that the borrow area material to be used
in the sub-grade satisfies the requirements of design CBR.
1.7.2 Sub-grade shall be compacted and finished to the design strength consistent with
other physical requirements. The actual laboratory CBR values of constructed sub
grade shall be determined on undisturbed samples cut out from the compacted sub-
grade in CBR mould fitted with cutting shoe or on remoulded samples, compacted to
the field density at the field moisture content.
1.8 Measurements for Payment
Each embankment/sub-grade construction shall be measured separately by taking

cross sections at intervals given in sub-section 113.3 of MORT&H after completion of
clearing and grubbing (not the virgin ground level) and after completion of
embankment/sub-grade and computing the volumes of earthwork in cubic metres by
the method of average end areas.
93
The measurement of fill material from borrow areas shall be the difference between
the net quantities of compacted fill and the net quantities of suitable material brought
from roadway and drainage excavation. For this purpose, it shall be assumed that
one cu.m of suitable material brought to site from road and drainage excavation
forms one cu.m of compacted fill and all bulking or shrinkage shall be ignored.
The embankment constructed out of pond ash with soil cover at intervening layer and
at edge shall be measured in cu.m including soil cover volume. Construction of
embankment under water shall be measured in cu.m.
Construction of high embankment with specified material and in specified manner

shall be measured in cu.m.
Stripping including storing and reapplication of top soil shall be measured in cu.m.
Work involving loosening and re compacting of ground supporting embankment/sub

grade shall be measured in cu.m.
Removal of unsuitable material at embankment/sub-grade foundation and

replacement with suitable material shall be measured in cu.m.
Scarifying existing granular/bituminous road surface shall be measured in square

metres.
Dismantling and removal of existing cement concrete pavement shall be measured

vide Clause 202.6 of MORT&H specification.
Filter medium and backfill material behind abutments, wing walls and other retaining
structures shall be measured as finished work in position in cu.m.
1.9 Rates
1.9.1 The Contract unit rates for the items of embankment and sub-grade construction
shall be payment in full for carrying out the required operations including full
compensation for:
i. Cost of arrangement of land as a source of supply of material of required

quantity for construction unless provided otherwise in the Contract;
ii. Setting out;
iii. Compacting ground supporting embankment/sub-grade except where
removal and replacement of suitable material or loosening and re compacting
is involved;
iv. Scarifying or cutting continuous horizontal benches 300 mm wide on side
slopes of existing embankment and sub-grade as applicable;
v. Cost of watering or drying of material in borrow areas and/or embankment
and sub-grade during construction as required;
vi. Spreading in layers, bringing to appropriate moisture and compacting to
Specification requirements;
vii. Shaping and dressing top and slopes of the embankment and sub grade
including rounding of corners;
viii. Restricted working at sites of structures;
ix. Working on narrow width of embankment and sub-grade;
94
x. Excavation in all soils from borrow pits/designated borrow areas including
clearing and grubbing and transporting the material to embankment and sub-
grade site with all lifts and leads unless otherwise provided for in the Contract;
xi. All labour, materials, tools, equipment and incidentals necessary to complete
the work to the Specifications;
xii. Dewatering; and
xiii. Keeping the embankment/completed formation free of water as per Clause
311 of MORT&H specification.
1.9.2 Clause 301.9.5 of MORT&H specification shall apply as regards Contract unit rates
for items of stripping and storing top soil and of reapplication of topsoil.
1.9.3 Clause 301.9.2 of MORT&H specification shall apply as regards Contract unit rate for
the item of loosening and re-compacting the embankment/sub-grade foundation.
1.9.4 Clause 309.1.1 and 305.8 of MORT&H specification shall apply as regards Contract
rates for items of removal of unsuitable material and replacement with suitable
material respectively.
1.9.5 The Contract unit rate for scarifying existing granular/bituminous road surface shall
be payment in full for carrying out the required operations including full compensation
for all labour, materials, tools, equipment and incidentals, necessary to complete the
work.
This will also comprise of handling, giving credit towards salvage value and disposal
of the dismantled materials with all leads and lifts or as otherwise specified.
1.9.6 Clause 202.7 of MORT&H specification shall apply as regards Contract unit rate for
dismantling and removal of existing cement concrete pavement.
1.9.7 The Contract unit rate for providing and laying filter material behind abutments shall
be payment in full for carrying out the required operations including all materials,
labour, tools, equipment and incidentals to complete the work to Specifications.
1.9.8 Clause 1.4.6 shall apply as regards Contract unit rate for construction of
embankment under water.
1.9.9 Clause 1.4.7 shall apply as regards Contract unit rate for construction of high
embankment. It shall include cost of instrumentation, its monitoring and settlement
period, where specified in the Contract or directed by the Engineer.
ITEM NO: 2
Earth work in cutting in all sorts of soil and soft Murrum including Macadam / Asphalt
roads & jungle cutting for new road, widening of Road, Re-sectioning & Profile
correction of Road & other Road structures etc. as per detailed drawing and detailed
Specifications attached with suitable means as approved including cutting and
loading in tippers, trimming bottom and side slopes, in accordance with requirements
of lines, grades and cross sections, and transporting to the embankment location
within the boundary limit including all lifts and lead from the end of cutting &
spreading in required layer and dressing the excavated stuff for embankment for road
portions as per detailed drawing incl. Clearing and grubbing road land as per detailed
specification attached etc. complete as directed
95
1. The land width required for the roadway, gutter side slopes and catch water gutters
shall be cleared of all trees having a girth of 30 cms and less, loose, stones,
vegetation, bushes, stumps and all other objectionable materials. The roots of trees
and stumps shall be removed to a depth of 30 cms below the grade formation and
slopes and excavation filled up with excavated materials and compacted. All the
materials cleared will be the property of Government. Useful materials shall be
arranged in convenient stacks along the road boundary or as directed at places with
all lead and lift, and handed over to the department in convenient sections.
Unsuitable material shall be burnt or otherwise disposed off by the contractor at his
own cost without causing any nuisance, inconvenience or damage to the work,
property or people in the neighborhood. If the materials are to be disposed off outside
the road land, necessary permission from the private land owners shall be taken by
the contractor and royalty etc. If any paid by him without claiming compensations In
all cases, the materials shall be disposed off in a neat manner.
2. After clearing the site, the alignment of the road shall be properly set out true to lines,
curves slopes, grades and sections as shown on the plans or directed by the
Engineer-in-charge. The contractor shall provide all labour and materials such as
lime, strings, pegs, nails, bamboos, stones mortar, concrete etc required for setting
out alignment establishing bench marks and giving profiles. The contractor shall be
responsible for maintaining the B.Ms. profiles alignments and other stakes and marks
as long as they are required for the work in the opinion of the Engineer. If the
contractor defaults in this respect even after the direction by the Engineer within the
specified time. They may be restored by the Engineer at the levels etc. If there is any
disagreement the contractor shall inform of it in writing to the officer concerned with
the specific reference to the sections before starting further work. Once the work has
started, no cognizance of any complaint shall be taken. Merely not signing of the
book shall not be deemed as disagreement.
3. Profiles of the section including the road side gutters to be excavated shall be laid at
suitable intervals of 10m to 50 m. or other intervals as directed by Engineer to
conform t8 the curved or straight alignment, sections, grades and side slopes. The
line out shall be clearly marked and profiles of embankments where excavated
materials are to be used shall be set up with the toe line marked on each side. The
road way section shall first be excavated with vertical side for each lift and the sides
slopes for that lift shall be excavated in steps. These steps shall be smoothened to
the required slope when the excavation reaches the road formation. The contractor
shall on no account excavate beyond the slopes or below the specified grade unless
so directed by the Engineer in writing. If excavation is done below the specified level
or outside the section, it shall not be paid for and the contractor shall be required to
fill up at his own cost such extra excavation in the road portion, with approved
materials of the embankment grade in layers, watered and fully compacted to attain
maximum density laid down for the embankment in its relevant item. The Engineer
may require measurement ridges and dead man to be left at specified intervals or
places and kept intact till ordered to be removed for the purpose of check
measurements. The excavation shall be finished neatly, smoothly, and evenly to the
correct lines, curves, grades, if loose shall be scarified, watered and compacted to
the same density as the embankment. The section, side slopes and catch water
gutter shall be maintained by the contractor at his own cost in such a way that the
formation and gutters will be drained by providing for necessary diversions etc, and
not damaged due to obstruction of any drainage. Necessary passages shall be
provided for leading away seepage, springs, surface flow or rainwater safely without
damaging the work If any damage occurs due to default of the contractor in this
respect, he shall make good the damage at his own cost. If it is necessary in the
execution of the work to interrupt existing surface drainage, irrigation channels,
sewers or under drainage, temporary arrangements shall be provided till such time
96
as is necessary. The contractor at his own cost shall make the existing works or work
in hand caused as a result of his operations or negligence shall be made good by the
contractor at his own cost. Road side gutters shall be excavated to the specified
sections and shall be measured along with the main cutting in cubic meters
4. If slides occur in the cutting they shall be removed as ordered by the Engineer. If
finished slopes slide into the roadways before the final acceptance of the work, such
slides shall be removed by the contractor and shall be paid for at the contract rate for
the class of excavation involved provided the slides are not due to any negligence of
the contractor. The classification of the material in slides shall conform to its
conditions at the time of removal and payment made accordingly regardless of its
prior condition. Care shall be taken to see that excavation is arranged in a safe way
so that there will be no risk to the workmen by slides, falling materials, boulders and
collapsing sides etc.
5. If there is traffic nearby or it there are towns and villages in the neighborhood,
barricades and or traffic signals shall be provided day and night for the duration of
the work in such a way as to prevent accidents Warning signals shall be displayed at
7mt from the danger point on both sides giving sufficient warning. If necessary,
signalers shall be stationed at each end to regulate traffic where it is heavy.
Measures shall be taken to see that the excavation does not affect or damage
adjoining structures or property. If there is damage to property, injury to workers, the
members of the public, animals etc.. due to the negligence of the contractor, he will
be responsible and liable to all the consequences including compensation.
6. All the excavated materials shall be property of Government. When the useful
excavated material is to be used in embankment with all lead and all lift, it shall be
directly deposited at the required location in specified layers. No handing or
conveyance charges shall be paid it the material is temporarily deposited elsewhere
and subsequently conveyed to site of deposition. The sequence of operations at
convenient places, without interfering with the drainage in any way If no Government
land is available but the excavated useful stuff is to be stacked temporarily before
use under the same agreement, the contractor shall make his own arrangements for
the stacking of this material not required for use on embankment or unsuitable
materials may be used on his own to uniformly widen embankment to flatten slopes
and to fill low places in the road land, if so permitted by the Engineer. Material not
required for any use whatsoever may be disposed off by .the contractor at his own
cost in a manner approved by the Engineer. The excavated material shall not be
deposited within 3 m from the top edge of slope or toe of the bank. The lead shall be
measured from the junction point of cutting and embankment up to 200 mt. on either
side.
7. If the contractor does not wish to utilize the quantity of cutting within the specified
lead for any reason, then he may do the embankment work with the earth from other
sources (except borrow pits in the length of the road where cutting stuff is to be
utilized) but in that case the full or part quantity on acceptable quality stuff for which
payment is made or to be made will be deducted from the net quantity of the earth
work in the embankment arrived at within the chainage measured as above.
8. The Contract rate shall be a unit of one cubic metre for the start mentioned in the
wording of the item of excavation acceptably completed, limited to the dimensions
shown on the plans or as directed by the Engineer. Excavation shall be measured in
its original positions by taking cross sections before the work starts and after it is
entirely completed. The quality shall be worked by the average end area method.
When the classification of the strata changes, the contractor shall bring this to notice
of the Engineer, who will then verify and if necessary take levels for the changed
strata for purpose of measurement.
97
ITEM NO: 3
Providing, spreading, mixing by mix in place, dressing & compacting close graded
material Grade- III as per gradation of MORTH with specified 65 % sharp, clean graded
sand having CBR not less than 10 %, 35 % Crushed black trap aggregates of size 12
mm to 50 mm from approved quarry located outside the ROW limit including all
required leads & lifts in a layer of not more than 150 mm Thick compacted and
spreading in uniform layer in such loose quantities that the thickness of each
compacted layer should not be less than required compacted thickness of layers
shown on the drawing on well prepared base / sub-base / sub-grade by using a motor
grader, dressing, watering, mixing by mix in place method with rotavator at OMC,
compacting with vibratory roller of minimum 80 to 100 KN static weight with plain
drum or heavy pneumatic tyred roller of minimum 200 to 300 KN weight having
minimum tyre pressure of 0.70 MN/M2 whichever is suitable as per site condition, to
achieve the desired density at O.M.C. including filling the depression which occur
during the process all lead & lift, all taxes, royalty etc. complete as directed and as per
1.0 Scope
This work shall consist of laying and compacting well-graded material on prepared sub grade
in accordance with the requirements of these Specifications. The material shall be laid in one
or more layers as sub-base or lower sub-base and upper sub-base (termed as sub base
hereinafter) as necessary according to lines, grades and cross-sections shown on the
drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
2 Materials
2.1 The material to be used for the work shall be natural sand, crushed gravel, crushed
stone, or combination thereof depending upon the grading required. The material shall
be free from organic or other deleterious constituents and shall conform to the quality
standards as prescribed in the specifications.
Table 1 prescribes four gradings for Granular Sub-Base (GSB). Gradings I in Table 1 is
well graded granular sub-base materials. These can be used at locations where
drainage requirement are not predominant. Gradings III is gap graded and addresses to
the concern of the drainage requirements. These can be used at location experiencing
heavy rainfall, flooding etc. Cases where GSB is to be provided in two layers, it is
recommended to adopt either grading III or grading IV for lower layer and either grading I
or grading II for upper layer. Minimum thickness of lower layer at locations where
drainage requirements are predominant shall not be less than 200 mm. The grading to
be adopted for a project shall be as specified in the Contract.
2.2 Physical requirements: The material shall have a 10 percent fines value of 50kN or more
(for sample in soaked condition) when tested in compliance with IS: 2386 (Part IV) 1963.
The water absorption value of the coarse aggregate shall be determined as per IS:2386
(Part 3). If this value is greater than 2 percent, the soundness test shall be carried out on
the material delivered to site as per IS:383.
3 Strength of Sub-Base
It shall be ensured prior to actual execution that the material to be used in the sub-base
satisfies the requirements of CBR and other physical requirements when compacted and
finished. When directed by the Engineer, this shall be verified by performing CBR tests in the
laboratory as required on specimens remoulded at field dry density and moisture content.
Table: 1
98
Grading for Granular Sub-base Materials
IS Sieve Designation Percent by weight passing the IS sieve
Grading I Grading III
75.0 mm 100 100

53.0 mm 80-100 100
26.5 mm 55-90 55-75
9.50 mm 35-65
4.75 mm 25-55 10-30
2.36 mm 20-40
0.425 mm 10-15
0.075 mm <5 <5
CBR Value (Minimum) 30 30
Note: The material passing 425 micron (0.425 mm) sieve for the grading when tested
according to IS:2720 (Part 5) shall have liquid limit and plasticity index not more than 25 and
6 percent respectively.
4 Construction Operations
4.1 Preparation of sub grade : Immediately prior to the laying of sub-base, the sub
grade already finished to Clause 301 or 305 of MORT&H specification as applicable
shall be prepared by removing all vegetation and other extraneous matter, lightly
sprinkled with water, if necessary and rolled with two passes of 80–100 kN smooth
wheeled roller.
4.2 Spreading and compacting: The sub-base material of grading specified in the
Contract shall be spread on the prepared sub grade with the help of a motor grader
of adequate capacity, its blade having hydraulic controls suitable for initial adjustment
and for maintaining the required slope and grade during the operation or other means
as approved by the Engineer.
When the sub-base material consists of combination of materials mentioned in

Clause 2.1, mixing shall be done mechanically. Mixing shall be done in a separate
yard by pug mill or other approved mechanical means so as to issue homogenous &
uniform mix.
Moisture content of the loose material shall be checked in accordance with IS: 2720
(Part 2) and suitably adjusted by sprinkling additional water from a truck mounted or
trailer mounted water tank and suitable for applying water uniformly and at controlled
quantities to variable widths of surface or other means approved by the Engineer so
that, at the time of compaction, it is from 1 percent above to 2 percent below the
optimum moisture content corresponding to IS: 2720 (Part 8). While adding water,
due allowance shall be made for evaporation losses. After water has been added, the
material shall be processed by mechanical or other approved means until the layer is
uniformly wet.
Immediately thereafter, rolling shall start. If the thickness of the compacted layer
does not exceed 100 mm, a smooth wheeled roller of 80 to 100 kN weight may be
used. For a compacted single layer upto 200 mm the compaction shall be done with
the help of a vibratory roller of minimum 80 to 100 kN static weight with plain drum or
pad foot-drum or heavy pneumatic tyred roller of minimum 200 to 300 kN weight
99
having a minimum tyre pressure of 0.7 MPa or equivalent capacity roller capable of
achieving the required compaction. Rolling shall commence at the lower edge and
proceed towards the upper edge longitudinally for portions having unidirectional
cross fall and super-elevation shall commence at the edges and progress towards
the centre for portions having cross fall on both sides.
Each pass of the roller shall uniformly overlap not less than one-third of the track
made in the preceding pass. During rolling, the grade and cross fall (camber) shall be
checked and any high spots or depressions which become apparent, corrected by
removing or adding fresh material. The speed of the roller shall not exceed 5 km per
hour.
Rolling shall be continued till the density achieved is at least 98 percent of the
maximum dry density for the material determined as per IS: 2720 (Part 8). The
surface of any layer of material on completion of compaction shall be well closed,
free from movement under compaction equipment and from compaction planes,
ridges, cracks or loose material. All loose, segregated or otherwise defective areas
shall be made good to the full thickness of layer and re-compacted.
The surface finish of construction shall conform to the requirements of Clause 902 of
MORT&H specification. Control on the quality of materials and works shall be exercised by
the Engineer in accordance with Section 900 of MORT&H specification.
6.0 Arrangements for Traffic
During the period of construction, arrangements for the traffic shall be provided and
maintained in accordance with Clause 112 of MORT&H specification.
7.0 Measurements for Payment
Granular sub-base shall be measured as finished work in position in cubic metres.

The protection of edges of granular sub-base extended over the full formation as shown in
the drawing shall be considered incidental to the work of providing granular sub-base and as
such no extra payment shall be made for the same.
8.0 Rate
The Contract unit rate for granular sub-base shall be payment in full for carrying out the
required operations including full compensation for:
a. Making arrangements for traffic to Clause 112 of MORT&H except for initial treatment to
verges, shoulders and construction of diversions;
b. Furnishing all materials to be incorporated in the work including all royalties, fees, rents
where applicable with all leads and lifts;
c. All labour, tools, equipment and incidentals to complete the work to the Specifications;
d. Carrying out the work in part widths of road where directed; and
e. Carrying out the required tests for quality control.
ITEM NO: 4
Providing, spreading, mixing by mix in place, dressing & compacting close graded
material Grade- I as per gradation of MORTH with specified 30 % sharp, clean graded
100
sand having CBR not less than 30 %, 70 % Crushed black trap aggregates of size 12
mm to 75 mm from approved quarry located outside the ROW limit approved quarry
located outside the ROW limit including all required leads & lifts in a layer of not more
than 150 mm Thick compacted and spreading in uniform layer in such loose
quantities that the thickness of each compacted layer should not be less than
required compacted thickness of layers shown on the drawing on well prepared base /
sub-base / sub-grade by using a motor grader , dressing, watering, mixing by mix in
place method with rotavator at OMC, compacting with vibratory roller of minimum 80
to 100 KN static weight with plain drum or heavy pneumatic tyred roller of minimum
200 to 300 KN weight whichever is suitable as per site condition having minimum
depression which occur during the process all lead& lift , all taxes, royalty etc.
complete as directed and as per detailed specification.
1. Relevant specifications given for GSB Item No:3 as described shall be

applicable to this item.
3. The Contract unit rate for granular sub-base shall be payment in full for carrying out
the required operations including full compensation for:
a. Making arrangements for traffic to Clause 112 of MORT&H except for initial
treatment to verges, shoulders and construction of diversions;
b. Furnishing all materials to be incorporated in the work including all royalties,
fees, rents where applicable with all leads and lifts;
c. All labour, tools, equipment and incidentals to complete the work to the
Specifications;
d. Carrying out the work in part widths of road where directed; and
e. Carrying out the required tests for quality control.
ITEM NO: 5
Providing, Laying, spreading & compacting specified graded M.C. black stone
aggregate of specific size to construct the compacted base for bridge approaches on
each side to wet Mix Macadam Specifications (As Per detailed Specifications
attached) incl. premixing the Material with water at OMC in mechanical mix plant ,
carriage of mix material by tipper to site, laying in uniform required layer in such
quantity that the thickness of each compacted layer should not be less than the
required compacted thickness of layers shown on the Drawings of each layer with a
hydrostatic paver finisher with sensor control to the required lines, grade, level and
cross - sections as shown on the drawing in base course on a well prepared under
base / sub-base, compacting with Tandem vibratory roller of minimum static weight of
80 to100 KN which is suitable as per site condition to achieved the desired density
incl. lift, all taxes, royalty, materials, labours, plants and equipments etc. complete as
directed and as per detailed specification.
1) Scope:
This work shall consist of laying and compacting clean, crushed, graded aggregate and
granular material, premixed with water, to a dense mass on a prepared sub grade / sub-
base / base or existing pavement as the case may be in accordance with the
requirements of these specifications. The material shall be laid in one or more layers as
necessary to lines, grades and cross-sections shown on the approved drawings or as
directed by the Engineer.
101
The thickness of a single compacted Wet Mix Macadam layer shall not be less than 75
mm. When vibrating or other approved types of compacting equipment are used, the
compacted depth of a single layer of the sub-base course may be increased to 200 mm
upon approval of the Engineer.
2) Material:
2.1 Aggregates
2.1.1 Physical requirements:
Coarse aggregates shall be black trap crushed stone the aggregates shall conform to
the physical requirements set forth in MORTH Table 400-10 below.
MORTH Table 400-10

A) Physical Requirements of Coarse Aggregates for Wet Mix Macadam for Sub-base/ Base Courses
Sr.No Test Requirement

1 *Los Angeles IS : 2386 (Part – 4) 40 percent (Max.)
Abrasion value
or IS : 2386 (Part – 4) 30 percent (Max.)
*Aggregate or IS : 5640
Impact value
2 Combined IS : 2386 (Part – 1) 30 percent (max.)
Flakiness and
Elongation
indices (Total)
* Aggregate may satisfy requirements of either of the two tests.

** To determine this combined proportion, the flaky stone from a representative
sample should first be separated out. Flakiness index is weight of flaky stone
metal divided by weight of stone sample. Only the elongated particles be
separated out from the remaining (non-flaky) stone metal. Elongation index is
weight of elongated particles divided by total non-flaky particles. The value of
flakiness index and elongation index so found are added up.
If the water absorption value of the coarse aggregate is greater than 2 percent, the
soundness test shall be carried out on the material delivered to site as per IS: 2386
(Part – 5).
2.1.2 Grading requirements:

The aggregates shall conform to the grading given in MORTH Table 400-11.
MORTH Table 400-11
Grading Requirements of Aggregates for Wet Mix Macadam
Sieve Size Gradation

53.00 mm 100
45.00 mm 95-100
26.50 mm -
22.40 mm 60-80
11.20 mm 40-60
4.75 mm 25-40
2.36 mm 15-30
600.00 micron 8-22
75.00 micron 0-8
102
Materials finer than 425 micron shall have Plasticity Index (PI) not exceeding 6.
The final gradation approved within these limits shall be well graded from coarse to
fine and shall not vary from the low limit on one sieve to the high limit on the adjacent
sieve or vice versa.
3) Construction Operations:
3.1 Preparation of base: MORTH Clause 404.3.1 shall apply.

3.2 Provision of lateral confinement of aggregates:
While constructing wet mix macadam, arrangement shall be made for the
lateral confinement of wet mix. This shall be done by laying materials in
adjoining shoulders along with that of wet mix macadam layer and following
the sequence of operations described in MORTH Clause 407.4.1.
3.3 Preparation of mix

 Wet Mix Macadam shall be prepared in an approved mixing plant of suitable capacity
having provision for controlled addition of water and forced / positive mixing
arrangement like pug mill four bin feeders or pan type mixer of concrete batching
plant. For small quantity of wet mix work, the Engineer may permit the mixing to be
done in concrete mixers.
Optimum moisture for mixing shall be determined in accordance with IS : 2720 (Part
– 8) after replacing the aggregate fraction retained on 22.4 mm sieve with material of
4.75 mm to 22.4 mm size. While adding water, due allowance should be made for
evaporation losses. However, at the time of compaction, water in the wet mix should
not vary from the optimum value by more than agreed limits. The mixed material
should be uniformly wet and no segregation should be permitted.
3.4 Spreading of mix

 Immediately after mixing, the aggregates shall be spread uniformly and evenly upon
the prepared sub grade / sub-base / base in required quantities. In no case should
these be dumped in heaps directly on the area where these are to be laid nor shall
their hauling over a partly completed stretch be permitted.
 The mix may be spread either by a paver finisher or motor grader as directed by
Engineer-in-Charge. For portions where mechanical means cannot be used, manual
means as approved by the Engineer shall be used. The motor grader shall be
capable of spreading the material uniformly all over the surface. Its blade shall have
hydraulic control suitable for initial adjustments and maintaining the same so as to
achieve the specified slope and grade.
 The paver finisher shall be self-propelled, having the following features:-
 Loading hoppers and suitable distribution mechanism.
 The screed shall have tamping and vibrating arrangement for initial compaction to the
layer as it is spread without rutting or otherwise marring the surface profile.
 The paver shall be equipped with necessary control mechanism so as to ensure that
the finished surface is free from surface blemishes.
 The surface of the aggregate shall be carefully checked with templates and all high
or low spots remedied by removing or adding aggregate as may be required. The
layer may be tested by depth blocks during construction. No segregation of larger
and fine particles should be allowed. The aggregates as spread should be of uniform
gradation with no pockets of fine materials.
3.5 Compaction:
After the mix has been laid to the required thickness, grade and cross fall / camber the
same shall be uniformly compacted, to the full depth with approved VIBRATORY roller.
103
For a compacted single layer upto 200 mm, the compaction shall be done with the help
of vibratory roller of 8 to 10 tones capacity. The speed of the roller shall not exceed 5
km/h.
In portions having unidirectional cross fall / super elevation, rolling shall
commence from the lower edge and progress gradually towards the upper edge.
Thereafter, roller should progress parallel to the centre line of the road, uniformly
over-lapping each preceding track by at least one third width until the entire
surface has been rolled. Alternate trips of the roller shall be terminated in stops at
least 1 m away from any preceding stop.
In portions in camber, rolling should begin at the edge with the roller running
forward and backward until the edges have been firmly compacted. The roller shall
then progress gradually towards the centre parallel to the centre line of the road
uniformly overlapping each of the preceding tracks by at least one-third width until
the entire surface has been rolled.
Any displacement occurring as a result of reversing of the direction of a roller of
from any other cause shall be corrected at once as specified and / or removed and
made good.
Along forms, kerbs, walls or other places not accessible to the roller, the mixture
shall be thoroughly compacted with mechanical tampers or a plate compactor,
skin patching of an area without scarifying the surface to permit proper bonding of
the added material shall not be permitted.
Rolling should not be done when the sub grade is soft or yielding or when it
causes a wave-like motion in the sub-base / base course or sub grade. If
irregularities develop during rolling which exceed 12 mm when tested with a 3
metre straight edge, the surface should be loosened and premixed material added
or removed as required before rolling again so as to achieve a uniform surface
conforming to the desired grade and cross fall. In no case should the use of
unmixed material be permitted to make up the depressions.
Rolling shall be continued till the density achieved is at least 98 percent of the
maximum dry density for the material as determined by the method outlined in IS:
2720 (Part – 8).
After completion, the surface of any finished layer shall be well-closed free from
movement under compaction equipment or any compaction planes, ridges, cracks
and loose material. All loose, segregated or otherwise defective areas shall be
made good to the full thickness of the layer and recomputed.
3.6 Setting and drying:

After final compaction of wet mix macadam course, the road shall be allowed
to dry for 24 hours.
4.0 Construction Opening to Traffic:
Preferably no vehicular traffic of any kind should be allowed on the finished
wet mix macadam surface till it has dried and the wearing course laid.
5. Surface Finish and Quality Control of Work :
5.1 Surface evenness :-
The surface finish of construction shall conform to the requirements of Clause
902 of Quality Control Section of MoRTH.
5.2 Quality Control:-
Control on the quality of materials and works shall be exercised by the
Engineer in accordance with Section 900 of MoRTH.
6. Work Rectification of Surface Irregularity:
Where the surface irregularity of the wet mix macadam course exceeds the
permissible tolerances or where the course is otherwise defective due to sub
104
grade soil getting mixed with the aggregates, the full thickness of the layer
shall be scarified over the affected area, reshaped with added premixed
material or removed and replaced with fresh premixed material as applicable
and re compacted in accordance with Clause 3. The area treated in the
aforesaid manner shall not be less than 5 m long and 2 m wide. In no case shall
depressions be filled up with unmixed and ungraded material or fines.
7. Arrangement for Traffic :
During the period of construction, arrangement of traffic shall be done as per
direction of Engineer in Charge.
8. Measurements for Payment:
Wet mix macadam shall be measured as finished work in position in metric
tonne measured at plant site
9. Rates
The contract unit rate for wet mix macadam shall be payment in full for carrying out
the required operations including Engaging engineers and survey staff , furnishing
necessary survey instruments, preparing L.S., C.S. as directed and full compensation
for all components listed in MORTH Clause 401.8.
ITEM NO: 6
Providing & applying Primer coat with Bitumen Emulsion (Grade-MS) complying with
IS: 8887 at the rate of 0.60 Kg. per Sq m of Road area over prepared surface of
granular base (As Per detailed Specifications attached) by using Bitumen pressure
distributor for spraying the primer uniformly at the rates 0.60 Kg. per Sq m of road
area and temperatures with self heating arrangement , heating bitumen, cleaning the
road surface as per MoRTH specifications etc. complete incl. applying a very thin
layer of clean sand to the surface of primer to prevent the primer picking up under the
wheel of pavers and tippers including all labour charges and cost of all materials
involved in the work, transporting charges, material testing charges & Incidental
charges etc. complete as directed and as per detailed specification.
1.0 Scope
This work shall consist of the application of a single coat of low viscosity liquid bituminous
material to a porous granular surface preparatory to the superimposition of bituminous
treatment or mix.
2.0 Materials
The bituminous material to be used as primer shall be such that it can penetrate about 10
mm deep into base course. Bitumen emulsion MS grade conforming to IS: 8887/ASTM
D2397 or medium curing cutback bitumen conforming to IS: 2177 can be used as primer.
Quantity of MS grade bitumen emulsion for various types of granular surface shall be as per
Table 1:
Table 1 Quantity of Bitumen Emulsion for Various Types of Granular Surface
Type of Surface Rate of spray (kg / sq.m)
WMM/ WBM 0.7 – 1.0
Mechanically lime/cement stabilized soil 0.9 – 1.2

105
bases, lime cement bases
Gravel bases, Crusher run Macadam and 1.2 – 1.5

crushed rock bases
The correct quantity of primer shall be decided by the Engineer and shall be such that the
maximum amount that can be absorbed by the surface without causing run-off of excessive
primer and to achieve desired penetration of 10 mm.
3.0 Weather and Seasonal Limitations

Bitumen emulsion shall be applied on a damp surface. Surfaces which are to receive
emulsion primer should be damp, but no free or standing water shall be present. Surface can
be just wet by very light sprinkling of water. Primer shall not be applied during a dust storm
or when the weather is foggy, rainy or windy or when the temperature in the shade is less
than 10°C.
4 Construction
4.1 Equipment: The primer distributor shall be a self-propelled or towed bitumen

pressure sprayer equipped for spraying the material uniformly at specified rates and
temperatures. Hand spraying shall not be allowed except in small areas, inaccessible
to the distributor, or in narrow strips where primer shall be sprayed with a pressure
hand sprayer, or as directed by the Engineer.
4.2 Preparation of road surface: The surface to be primed shall be prepared in

accordance with MORT&H Clauses 501.8 and 902 as appropriate. Immediately prior
to applying the primer, the surface shall be swept clean of dust and loose and other
foreign particles using power broom or mechanical sweepers, care being taken not to
disturb the interlocked aggregates.
4.3 Application of bituminous primer: After preparation of base as per MORT&H

clause 502.4.2, the primer shall be sprayed uniformly in accordance with MORT&H
Clause 501. The method for application of the primer will depend on the type of
equipment to be used, size of nozzles, pressure at the spray bar and speed of
forward movement. The Contractor shall demonstrate at a spraying trial, that the
equipment and method to be used is capable of producing a uniform spray, within the
tolerances specified.
No heating or dilution of MS emulsion and preparation of cutback bitumen shall be
permitted at site. Temperature of cutback bitumen shall be high enough to permit the
primer to be sprayed effectively.
4.4 Curing of primer and opening to traffic: A primed surface shall be allowed to cure
for at least 24 hours or such other higher period as is found to be necessary to allow
all the moisture/volatiles to evaporate before any subsequent surface treatment or
mix is laid. Any unabsorbed primer shall first be blotted with an application of sand,
using the minimum quantity possible. A primed surface shall not be opened to traffic
other than that necessary to lay the next course.
4.5 Tack coat: Over the primed surface, a tack coat should be applied in accordance
with MORT&H Clause 503.
106
5.0 Quality Control of Work
For control of the quality of materials and the works carried out, the relevant
provisions of Section 900 shall apply.
During construction operations, arrangements for traffic shall be made in accordance

with the provisions of MORT&H Clause 112.
7.0 Measurement for Payment

Prime coat shall be measured in terms of surface area of application in square
metres.
8.0 Rate
The contract unit rate for prime coat shall be payment in full for carrying out the
required operations including full compensation for all components listed in MORT&H
Clause 401.8 (i) to (v) and as applicable to the work specified in these Specifications.
Payment shall be made on the basis of the provision of prime coat at an application
rate of quantity, unless otherwise specified in the BOQ, at 0.6 kg per square metre,
with adjustment, plus or minus, for the variation between this amount and the actual
amount approved by the Engineer after the preliminary trials referred to in MORT&H
Clause 502.4.3.
ITEM NO: 7
Providing & applying Tack coat with Bitumen Emulsion (Grade-MS) complying with IS
: 8887 at the rate of 0.25 Kg. per Sq m of Road area over prepared surface of granular
base (As Per detailed Specifications attached) by using Bitumen pressure distributor
for spraying the primer uniformly at the rates 0.25 Kg. per Sq m of road area and
temperatures with self heating arrangement , heating bitumen, cleaning the road
surface as per MoRTH specifications etc. complete incl. applying a very thin layer of
clean sand to the surface of primer to prevent the primer picking up under the wheel
of pavers and tippers including all labour charges and cost of all materials involved in
the work, transporting charges, material testing charges & Incidental charges etc.
2 Scope
This work shall consist of the application of a single coat of low viscosity liquid bituminous
material to existing bituminous, cement concrete or primed granular surface preparatory to
the superimposition of a bituminous mix, when specified in the Contract or instructed by the
Engineer.
2.0 Materials
The binder used for tack coat shall be either Cationic bitumen emulsion (MS ) complying with
IS 8887/ASTM D 2397 or suitable low viscosity paving bitumen of VG 10 grade conforming
to IS:73. The type and grade of tack coat shall be as specified in the Contract or as directed
by the Engineer.
107
3.0 Weather and Seasonal Limitations
Bituminous material shall not be applied during a dust storm or when the weather is foggy,
rainy or windy or when the temperature in the shade is less than 10°C. Where the tack coat
consists of emulsion, the surface shall be slightly damp, but not wet. Where the tack coat is
of cutback bitumen, the surface shall be dry.
4 Construction
4.1 Equipment: The tack coat shall be applied by a self-propelled or towed bitumen
pressure sprayer, equipped for spraying the material uniformly at a specified rate.
Hand spraying shall not be permitted except in small areas, inaccessible to the
distributor, or narrow strips, shall be sprayed with a pressure hand sprayer, or as
4.2 Preparation of base: The surface on which the tack coat is to be applied shall be
clean and free from dust, dirt, and any extraneous material, and be otherwise
prepared in accordance with the requirements of MORT&H Clauses 501.8 and 902
as appropriate.
The granular or stabilized surfaces shall be primed as per MORT&H Clause 502.
Immediately before the application of the tack coat, the surface shall be swept clean
with a mechanical broom, and high pressure air jet, or by other means as directed by
the Engineer.
Application of tack coat: The application of tack coat shall be at the rate specified
in the Contract, and shall be applied uniformly. If rate of application of Tack Coat is
not specified in the contract, then it shall be the rate specified in Table 1. No dilution
or heating at site of RS1 emulsion shall be permitted. Paving grade of bitumen if
used for tack coat shall be heated in bitumen boilers to achieve viscosity less than 2
poise.
The normal range of spraying temperature for a bituminous emulsion shall be 20°C to
70°C and for a cutback, 50°C to 80°C if RC-70/MC-70. Where a geo synthetic is
proposed for use, the provisions of MORT&H Clauses 703.3.2 and 703.4.4 shall
apply. The method of application of tack coat will depend on the type of equipment to
be used, size of nozzles, pressure at the spray bar, and speed or forward movement.
The Contractor shall demonstrate at a spraying trial, that the equipment and method
to be used is capable of producing a uniform spray, within the tolerances specified.
Where the material to receive an overlay is a freshly laid bituminous layer that has
not been subjected to traffic, or contaminated by dust, a tack coat is not mandatory
where the overlay is completed within two days.
Rate of Application of Tack Coat
Type of Surface Rate of spray of emulsion / cut back

Kg per sq m
Bituminous surfaces 0.20 – 0.30
Granular surfaces treated 0.25 – 0.30
with primer
Cement concrete pavement 0.30 – 0.35
108
4.3 Curing of tack coat
The tack coat shall be left to cure until all the volatiles have evaporated before any
subsequent construction is started. No plant or vehicles shall be allowed on the tack
coat other than those essential for the construction.
5 Quality Control of Work
For control of the quality of materials and the works carried out, the relevant
provisions of MORT&H Section 900 shall apply.
6 Arrangements for Traffic
During the period of construction, arrangements for traffic shall be made in

accordance with the provisions of MORT&H Clause 112.
7 Measurement for Payment
Tack coat shall be measured in terms of surface area of application in square metres.
8 Rate
The contract unit rate for tack coat shall be payment in full for carrying out the
required operations including for all components listed in MORT&H Clause 401.8 (i)
to (v) and as applicable to the work specified in these Specifications. The rate shall
cover the provision of tack coat, quantity unless otherwise specified in the BOQ, at
0.25 kg per square metre, with the provision that the variance in actual quantity of
bitumen used will be assessed and the payment adjusted accordingly.
ITEM NO: 8
Providing and laying bituminous macadam with 100-120 TPH hot mix plant producing
an average output of 75 tonnes per hour using crushed aggregates of specified
grading premixed with bituminous binder, transported to site, laid over a previously
prepared surface with paver finisher to the required grade, level and alignment and
rolled to achieve the desired compaction as per detailed specification.
1.0 Scope
This work shall consist of construction of single course of compacted crushed aggregates
premixed with a bituminous binder on a previously prepared base to the requirements of
these Specifications.
2.0 Materials
2.1 Bitumen: The bitumen shall be viscosity graded paving bitumen complying with
Indian Standard Specification for paving bitumen, IS:73. The grade of bitumen to be
used would depend upon the climatic conditions and the traffic. Guidelines for
selection of viscosity grade of paving grade bitumen are given in MoRTH Table 500-
5.
109
Table 500-5
Selection Criteria for Viscosity-graded (VG) Paving Bituminous Based on Climatic
Conditions
Highest Daily Mean Air Temperature, °C

Lowest Daily Mean Less than 20°C 20 to 30°C More than 30°C
Air Temperature,
°C
More than –10°C VG-10 VG-20 VG-30
-10°C or lower VG-10 VG-10 VG-20
2.2 Coarse aggregate :
The coarse aggregates shall consist of crushed rock, crushed gravel or other hard
material retained on 2.36 mm sieve. It shall be clean, hard, durable and cubical
shape, free from dust and soft organic and other deleterious substances. The
aggregate shall satisfy the physical requirements specified in Table 500-13. Where
crushed gravel is proposed for use as aggregate, not less than 90 percent by weight
of the crushed material retained on 4.75 mm sieve shall have at least two fractured
faces resulting from crushing operation. Before approval of the source, the
aggregates shall be tested for stripping. Where the Contractor‟s selected source of
aggregates have poor affinity for bitumen, as a condition for the approval of that
source, the bitumen shall be treated with approved anti-stripping agents, as per the
manufacturer‟s recommendations, without additional payment.
Table 500-13 Physical Properties of Coarse Aggregate
Property Test Requirement Test method

Cleanliness Grain size analysis Max. 5% passing IS 2386 Part
0.075 micron
Particle shape Flakiness Index Max. 16% IS 2386 Part I
Elongation Index Max 24%
Strength Los Angeles Abrasion Max. 40% IS 2386 Part IV
Value
Aggregate Impact Max. 30% IS 2386 Part IV
Value
Durability Soundness (Sodium or
Magnesium), 5 cycles
Sodium Sulphate Max. 12% IS 2386 Part V

Magnesium Sulphate Max. 18% IS 2386 Part V
Water absorption Water absorption Max. 2% IS 2386 Part III
Stripping Coating and Stripping Min. Retained IS 6241
of Bitumen Aggregate Coating 95%
Water sensitivity Retained Tensile Min 80% ASHTO 283

strength*
110
2.3 Fine aggregate:
Fine aggregates shall consist of crushed or naturally occurring mineral material, or a
combination of two, passing 2.36 mm sieve and retained on 75-micron sieve. It shall
be clean, hard, durable, free from dust and soft organic and other deleterious
substances. The amount of rounded, natural sand in the total fine aggregate shall be
limited to 10 percent if the BM is used within 100 mm from the road surface and to 50
percent if the BM is used more than 100 mm below the road surface.
2.4 Aggregate grading and binder content:

The combined grading of the coarse aggregates and fine aggregates, when tested in
accordance with IS 2386 Part 1, wet sieving method, shall conform to limits given in
MoRTH Table 500-4. The quantity of bitumen and appropriate thickness is also given
in Table 500-4.
MORTH Table 500-4

Aggregate Grading and Bitumen Content
Layer thickness 50 mm
Sieve Size mm Cumulative % by weight of total aggregate passing
45.00 100
26.50 75-100
22.40 60-95
11.20 30-55
5.6 15-35
2.36 4-19
0.075 0-5
Bitumen content ** 2.5
percent by mass of total
mix
* Nominal maximum aggregate size is the largest specified sieve size upon which any of the
aggregate material is retained.
** Corresponds to specific gravity of the Aggregate being 2.7. In case of aggregates
have specific gravity more than 2.7, bitumen content can be reduced proportionately.
2.5 The combined aggregate grading shall not vary from the lower limit on one sieve to
the higher limit on the adjacent sieve to avoid gap grading. The aggregate may be
proportioned and blended to produce a uniform mix complying with the requirements
of MoRTH Table 500-4.
2.6 Proportioning of material : The aggregates shall be proportioned and blended to

produce a uniform mixture complying with the requirements of Table 500-4, The
binder content shall be within a tolerance of + 0.3 percent by weight of total mixture
when individual specimens are taken for quality control tests in accordance with the
provisions of MoRTH Section 900.
3.0 Construction Operation

3.1 Weather and seasonal limitations : The provisions of Clause 501.5.1 of MoRTH
shall apply
3.2 Preparation of the base : The base on which bituminous macadam is to be laid
shall be prepared, shaped and compacted to the required profile in accordance with
MoRTH Clauses 501.8 and 902.3 as appropriate, and a prime coat, shall be applied
in accordance with Clause 502 where specified, or as directed by the Engineer.
111
3.3 Tack coat: A tack coat in accordance with MoRTH Clause 503 shall be applied as
required under the Contract, or as directed by the Engineer.
3.4 Preparation and transportation of the mix: The provisions of MoRTH Clause
501.3 and 501.4 shall apply.
3.5 Spreading: The provisions of MoRTH Clauses 501.5.3 shall apply.
3.6 Rolling: Compaction shall be carried out in accordance with the provisions of
MoRTH Clauses 501.6 and 501.7. Rolling shall be continued until the specified
density is achieved, or where no density is specified, until there is no further
movement under the roller. The required frequency of testing is defined in MoRTH
Clause 903.

The surface finish of the completed construction shall conform to the requirements of
MoRTH Clause 902. For control of the quality of materials and the works carried out,
the relevant provisions of MoRTH Section 900 shall apply.
5.0 Protection of the Layer

The bituminous macadam shall be covered with either the next pavement course or
wearing course, as the case may be, within a maximum of forty-eight hours. If there
is to be any delay, the course shall be covered by a seal coat to the requirement of
MoRTH Clause 512 before opening to any traffic. The seal coat in such cases shall
be considered incidental to the work and shall not be paid for separately.

During the period of construction, arrangements for traffic shall be made in
accordance with the provisions of MoRTH Clause 112.
7.0 Measurement for Payment

Bituminous macadam shall be measured as finished work in cubic metres, or by
weight in metric tonnes, where used as regulating course, or square metres at the
specified thickness as indicated in the Contract or shown on the drawings, or as
otherwise directed by the Engineer.
8.0 Rate
The contract unit rate for bituminous macadam shall be payment in full for carrying
out the required operations as specified. The rate shall include cost for, all
components listed in MoRTH Clause 501.8.8.2.
ITEM NO: 9
Providing and laying 20 mm Compacted thickness Mixed Seal Surfacing (As Per
detailed Specifications attached) on prepared surface as wearing course using
Bitumen Emulsion (Grade-MS) complying with IS: 8887 for tack coat at rate of 2.5 kg
per 10 Sq.m. and 5.80 MT mix material per 100 M2 for laying 20 mm thick M.S.S. using
machine crushed black stone aggregate & filler materials as per gradation and Paving
Bitumen of penetration grade -S65 or A65 (Grade - 60/70 As Per IS : 73) at the rate of
5.10 % by weight of total mix as binder using Drum Mix Plant & electronic sensor
paver finisher incl. loading of aggregates with front end loader, hot mixing of stone
aggregates & bitumen in Drum Mix Plant, transporting mixed material in tipper to
paver with all lead & lift, laying mix materials with electronic sensor paver finisher
with electronic sensing device for automatic leveling & profile control having at least
7.0M screed as approved to the required layers, level and grade, rolling with a set of
112
rollers: 80-100 static weight smooth wheeled (3 wheels or tandem) & 80-100/60-80 KN
smooth wheeled tandem vibratory roller to achieve the desired density, providing &
operating plant machineries & equipments, cost of aggregates, bitumen, sand, fuel,
oil & lubricates, all labour charges and cost of all materials involved in the work,
transporting charges material testing charges and incidental charges incl. flushing of
stone dust/ / sand if required etc. complete as directed and as per detailed
specification.
1. The work shall consist of constructing in a single course of mix seal surfacing as course
on a previously prepared base of carpet single course shall also include additional
thickness. If any to remove unevenness of the existing surface.
2. The fine aggregates shall consist of crushed run screening, natural sand or mixture of
both. There shall be clean hard durable, uncoated, dry and free from injurious, soft or
flaky pieces and organic or deleterious substance.
3. The filler, where required, shall be an inert material, the whole of which passes 600
micron sieve at least 90 percent passing 150 micron sieve and not less than 70 percent
passing 75 micron sieve. The filler shall be cement, stone dust, hydrated lime or fly ash
approved by the Engineer in charge.
4. The aggregates shall be so graded or combined as to confirm to the grading as under.

Sieve Designation Percent by weight passing
Sieve for type ‘A’ Mix seal
surfacing. 100
20mm 40 –
7.75mm 85
7.36mm 5 – 10
75 micron 0 -4
5. The samples of aggregate of requires grading for the work shall be got approved from
the Engineer-in-charge prior to transportation and collection on plant site. Unapproved
materials shall have to be removed from the plant site by the contractor at his own cost.
If contractor fails to remove the inferior type of materials from the plant site, the same
will be removed by the Department at the cost of the Contractor Collection of aggregate
shall be in different stacks according to various sizes of aggregates.
6. For the purpose of collection of materials, plant site shall be established at suitable
place, where hot mix plant shall be installed. Department will extend all necessary co-
operation in helping Contractor to get nearby Government land of establishing plant site.
However, department is not responsible if no such land is made available to the
Contractor and in that case, the Contractor will have to make his own arrangement for
the same. Incoming material shall be recorded in a register for the purpose of record.
7. The binder shall be straight run bitumen of a suitable grade satisfying the requirements
of IS:73. Bitumen shall be 60/80/100 grade and shall be supplied by the department at
the rate and place as mentioned in Schedule "A" of the tender and it shall have to be
carted, by the Contractor to the site of work at his own cost. Empty asphalt drums shall
have to be returned free of cost to PW.D. Store from where they are issued or as
directed, if so provided in Schedule 'A' Any damage caused to the asphalt drums or loss
of asphalt after issue from store shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. Drums of
asphalt shall be so stored so as to allow easy inspection and in such place as will not
damage the drums and cause the leakage of allow water and other foreign matter to
enter For the purpose of calculating consumption, wastage will not be allowed beyond
2.5 percent Excess consumption over 2.5 percent will be charged at a panel rate.
8. In case bitumen is to be issued by department in bulk, the same shall be issued to the
Contractor at plant site by tankers at the same rate as shown in Schedule 'A'. Contractor
shall have to make adequate arrangement for slacking bulk asphalt at plant site
113
according to the requirement No deduction in rate will be made for supplying heated
bulk asphalt.
9. The asphalt should not be used as a fuel. If however, Contractor is found to be using
asphalt as fuel, The quantity of asphalt utilized shall be assessed, by the Executive
Engineer whose decision will be final and binding to the Contractor who will be charged
at double the rate provided in Schedule 'A' of the agreement even though the total
consumption of asphalt may be within the theoretical consumption.
10. Department shall keep a day to day account of the supply and consumption of bitumen
in a separate bound register having numbered pages and the proforma prescribed by
the Department. Day to day signature of the Contractor's representative shall be
obtained in this register Issue rate of bitumen includes (i) Obtaining asphalt from
Department's store, (ii) Transporting to site, (iii) Storing and tacking. (iv) Keeping records
of supply and consumption and (v) Returning the empty drums in good condition to the
Department.
11. Mix seal surfacing shall not be laid during rainy weather or when the base course is
damp or wet.
12. The base on which mix seal surfacing is to be laid shall be thoroughly cleaned and free
of dust and foreign matter.
13. The work shall consist of application of mix seal surfacing of single coat of bituminous
material to an existing carpet surface preparatory to. bituminous construction. The
temperature of bitumen at the time of application shall be in the range of 160 degree
centigrade to 175 degree centigrade.
14. Tack coat for mix seal surfacing shall be applied as the work of laying mix seal surfacing
is being preceded by a bituminous open graded carpet.
15. The binder content for pre mixing shall be 4% by weight of the total unless otherwise
specified in item of schedule B of the work. Quantity of aggregate shall be sufficient to
yield the specified thickness after compaction.
16. Hot mix plant of adequate capacity and capable of producing a proper and uniform
quality shall be used for preparing the mix. The plant may be either a batch type or a
continuous one, having coordinated set of essential unit such as dryer for heating the
aggregates, a binder heating and control unit for metering out the correct quantity of
heated binder together with a paddle mixer for intimate mixing of the binder and
aggregate.
17. The temperature of binder at the time of mixing shall be the range of 150 -177 degree
centigrade and of "aggregates in the range of 155 - 163 degree centigrade. Provided
also that, at no time shall the difference in temperature between the aggregates and the
binder exceed 14 degree centigrade.
18. Mixing shall be thorough to ensure that a homogeneous mixture is obtained in which all
the particles to the mineral aggregates are coated uniformly.
19. The mix shall be transported from the mixing plant to the point of use in suitable
vehicles. The vehicles employed for transport shaft be clean and be covered over during
transit if so directed by the Engineer-in-charge.
20. The mix transported from the hot mix plant to the site, shall be spread by means of a self
propelled mechanical paver with suitable screeds capable of spreading, tamping and
114
finishing the mix, to specified grade, lines and cross sections. The temperature of mix at
the time of laying shall be in range 121-163 degree centigrade.
21. Longitudinal joints and edges shall be constructed true to the delineating lines parallel to
the centre line of the road. Longitudinal joints shall be offset by at least 150 mm. from
those in the binder course. All joints shall be cut vertical to the full thickness of the
previously laid mix and the surface painted with hot bitumen before placing fresh
material.
22. Immediately after the spreading of mix, it shall be thoroughly compacted by 8-10 tonnes
3 Wheel roller moving at a speed not exceeding 5 km per hour.
23. The roller wheels shall be kept damp to prevent the mix from adhering to them but in no
case shall fuel lubricating oil be used for this purpose. Rolling shall commence
longitudinally from the edge arid progress towards the centre except on super elevated
portions. When it shall progress from the lower to upper edge parallel to the centre line
of the pavement. The roller should/proceed on the fresh material with rear or mixed
wheel leading or as to minimise the pushing of the mix and each pass of the roller shall
uniformly overlap not less than one third of the track made in the preceding pass. Rolling
shall continue until the entire surface has been rolled to compaction and all the roller
marks eliminated.
24. Sand or stone dust flushing at the rate of 0.03 cmt / 10 smt. shall be done on asphalt
surface for which no separate payment will be made.
25. Traffic may be allowed immediately after completion of the final rolling when the mix has
cooled down to the surrounding temperature.
26. Surface finish and quality control of work : Control on the quality of materials and works
shall be exercised by the Engineer-in-charge by carrying out the following test at the
frequencies shown against each :-
Sr. Type of Test Frequency
No Construction
1 Tack Coat (i) Binder temperature At regular close intervals.
for application
(ii) Rate of spread of binder Two test per day
2 Semi Dense (i) Aggregate Impact Value One test per 100 Cu. m. of
Carpet (ii) Flakiness Index of aggre.
Aggre. -Do-
(iii) Stripping Value -Do-
(iv) Mix Grading One set of test on individual
constituents and mixed
aggregates from the dryer for
each 100 tonnes of mix subject
to a minimum of two test per
day
(v) Temperature of binder in
the boiler, aggregate in the At regular close intervals.
dryer and mix at the time of
laying and rolling
(vi) Control of binder
content One test for each 100 tonnes of
and gradation in the mix mix subject to max. of two test
(Binder Content test vide per day per plant
(ASTM D-2172)
(vii) rate of spread mix Regular control through checks

material on layer thickness
115
27. The contractor shall at all time carry out work on the highway in a manner creating least
interference to the flow of traffic while consistent with the satisfactory execution of the
same. For all work involving improvements to the existing highway, the contractor shall
in accordance with the directives if the Engineer-in-charge provide and maintain, during
the execution of the work, a passage for traffic either along a part of the existing carriage
way under improvement or on diversion.
28. In case of the improvement works, namely widening strengthening of the existing
payment or reconstruction repairs-to cross-drainage works. Where such works could be
carried out on part widths at a time and the traffic could simultaneously be passed
without undue delay and difficulty on the other part; the road shoulder shall be dressed
and brought in-line with the payment and maintained throughout out the duration of the
work to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-charge Where work is continued on long
stretches, passing places, at least 20 metre long and 6 metre wide inclusive of the width
of the existing carriage way shall be provided at half or one kilometer intervals as
directed by the Engineer-m-charge. Extra treatment to shoulders where necessary, shall
be given as ordered by the Engineer-in-charge
29. The contractor shall take the all necessary measures for the safety of traffic during
construction and provide, erect and maintain such barricades including signs, marking
lights and flagmen as may be required, by the Engineer-in-charge for the information
and protection of traffic approaching or passing through the section, of the highway
under improvement. Before taking up any construction an agreed phased programme
for the control of traffic on the highway shall be drawn up m consultation with the
Engineer-in-charge.
30. The barricades erected on either side of the carriage way/portion of the carriage way
closed to traffic shall be strong to resist violation, and painted with alternate black and
white stripes. Red lanterns or warning lights of similar type shall be mounted on the
barricades at night and kept lit throughout from sunset to sunrise. At the points where
traffic is to deviate from its normal path the channel for traffic shall be clearly marked
with the aid of payment marking painted drums or a similar device to the direction of the
Engineer-in-charge. At night the passages shall be delineated with lanterns or other
suitable light source.
31. One way traffic operation shall be established whenever the traffic is to be passed over
part of the carriage way inadequate for two lane traffic. This shall be done with the help
of flagmen kept positioned on opposite side during all hours. For regulation of traffic, the
flagmen shall be equipped with red and green flags and lanterns lights. On both sides,
suitable regulatory/warning signs shall be installed for the guidance of carriage way
begins and the other 120 metres away. The signs shall be of approved design and the
refractory type if so directed.
32. The payment shall be made on the sq.m basis.
33. The contract unit rate for mix seal surfacing shall be paid in full for carrying out the
required operation including full compaction for:
1 . Making arrangement of control and safety of traffic.
2. Preparation of base.
3. Providing all materials to be incorporated in the works with all lead and lift.
All labours, tools, equipments and incidental to complete the works to the specification.
116
ITEM NO: 10
Construction of dry lean cement concrete Sub- base over a prepared sub-Base with
coarse and fine aggregate conforming to IS: 383, the size of coarse aggregate not
exceeding 25 mm, aggregate cement ratio not to exceed 15:1, aggregate gradation
after blending to be as per table 600-1, cement content not to be less than 150 kg/
cum, optimum moisture content to be determined during trial length construction,
concrete strength not to be less than 10Mpa at 7 days, mixed in a batching plant,
transported to site, laid with a pavers with electronic sensor, compacting with 8-10
tones vibratory roller, finishing and curing incl. maintenance of Diversion, all required
lead and lift, all taxes, royalty etc. complete as directed and as per specification.
1) Scope
1.1 The work shall consist of construction of dry lean concrete sub-base for cement concrete
pavement in accordance with the requirements of these Specifications and in conformity
with the lines, grades and cross-sections shown on the drawings or as directed by the
Engineer. The work shall include furnishing of all plant and equipment, materials and
labour and performing all operations, in connection with the work, as approved by the
Engineer.
1.2 The design parameters of Dry Lean Concrete (DLC) sub-base, viz., width, thickness,
grade of concrete, details of joints, if any, etc. shall be as stipulated in the Contract
drawings.
2) Materials
2.1 Source of Materials:
The Contractor shall indicate to the Engineer the source of all materials with relevant test
data to be used in the dry lean concrete work sufficiently in advance and the approval of
the Engineer for the same shall be obtained at least 45 days before the scheduled
commencement of the work in trail length. If the Contractor later proposes to obtain the
materials from a different source, he shall notify the Engineer for his approval at least 45
days before such materials are to be used.
2.2 Cement: Any of the following types of cement may be used with prior approval of the
Engineer:
S. No. Type Conforming to

i) Ordinary Portland Cement 43 Grade IS:8112
ii) Portland Blast Furnace Slag Cement IS:455
iii) Portland Pozzolana Cement IS:1489-Part I
iv) Ordinary Portland Cement 53 Grade IS IS:12269
Note:
1) Fly ash up to 20 percent by weight of Cement may be used in 53 Grade Cement. No

fly ash shall be used in any other grade of Cement other than 53 Grade. The fly ash
shall conform to IS: 3812 (Part-I).
117
2) Site mixing of fly ash shall be permitted only after ensuring availability at site, uniform
blending through a specific mechanical facility with automated process control like
batch mix plant conforming to IS:4925 and IS:4926.
3) Mix design will be done as per IRC: SP: 49. The OPC content shall not be less than
135 kg/cu.m in case of blending at site. The curing period may be suitably enhanced
(by at least about 2 days).
If the sub-grade is found to consist of soluble sulphates in a concentration more than 0.5
percent, cement used shall be sulphate resistant and shall conform to IS: 6909. Cement to
be used may preferably be obtained in bulk form. It shall be stored in accordance with
stipulations contained in MORT&H Clause 1014 and shall be subjected to acceptance test
prior to its immediate use.
2.3 Aggregates
2.3.1 Aggregates for lean concrete shall be natural material complying with IS:383. The
aggregates shall not be alkali reactive. The limits of deleterious materials shall not
exceed the requirements set out in IS:383. In case the Engineer considers that the
aggregates are not free from dirt, the same may be washed and drained for at least
72 hours before batching, or as directed by the Engineer.
2.3.2 Coarse aggregates : Coarse aggregates shall consist of clean, hard, strong, dense,
non-porous and durable pieces of crushed stone or crushed gravel and shall be
devoid of pieces of disintegrated stone, soft, flaky, elongated, very angular or
splintery pieces. The crushed gravel/aggregate shall have at least one fracture faces.
The maximum size of the coarse aggregate shall be 31.5 mm. The coarse aggregate
shall comply with MORT&H Clause 602.2.4.2.
2.3.3 Fine aggregates: The fine aggregates shall consist of clean, natural sand or crushed
stone sand or a combination of the two and shall conform to IS: 383. Fine aggregate
shall be free from soft particles, clay, shale, loam, cemented particles, mica, organic
and other foreign matter. The fine aggregate shall comply with MORT&H Clause
602.2.4.3.
The fine aggregate shall not contain deleterious substances more than the following:
Clay lumps 1.0 percent

Coal and lignite 1.0 percent
Material passing IS Sieve No.75 micron
i) Natural sand (Uncrushed) 3.0 percent
ii) Crushed sand 8.0 percent
2.3.4 The coarse and fine aggregates may be obtained in either of the following manner:
i) In separate nominal sizes of coarse and fine aggregates and mixed together
intimately before use.
ii) Separately as 31.5 mm nominal, 25 mm nominal single size, 12.5 mm nominal
size graded aggregates and fine aggregate of Crushed stone dust or sand or a
combination of these three. They shall be mixed together in prescribed proportion
before use.
118
iii) Combined flakiness and elongation index shall not be more than 35 percent. The
material after blending shall conform to the grading as indicated in MORT&H
Table 600-1.
Table 600-1 Aggregate Gradation for Dry Lean Concrete
Sieve Designation Percentage by weight passing

the Sieve
31.5 mm 100
26.50 mm 90-95
19.0 mm 80-90
9.50 mm 55-75
4.75 mm 35-60
600.00 micron 10-35
75.00 micron 0-8
2.4 Water: Water used for mixing and curing of concrete shall be clean and free from
injurious amounts of oil, salt, acid, vegetable matter or other substances harmful to
the finished concrete. It shall meet the requirements stipulated in IS: 456.
2.5 Storage of materials: All materials shall be stored in accordance with the provisions
of MORT&H Clause 1014 of these Specifications and other relevant IS
Specifications. All efforts must be made to store the materials in proper places so as
to prevent their deterioration or contamination by foreign matter and to ensure their
satisfactory quality and fitness for use in the work. The storage place must also
permit easy inspection, removal and storage of materials. All such materials even
though stored in approved godowns must be subjected to acceptance test
immediately prior to their use. The requirements of storage yard specified in
MORT&H Clause 602.2.9 shall also be applicable.
In case of aggregates, the storing place must be elevated from the ground at least by
150 mm and should be a pucca paved platform i.e. cementitious treated GSB or soil
or any other granular material or brick paving.
3) Proportioning of Materials for the Mix
3.1 The mix shall be proportioned with a maximum aggregate cement ratio of 15: 1. The
water content shall be adjusted to the optimum as per MORT&H Clause 601.3.2 for
facilitating compaction by rolling. The strength and density requirements of concrete
shall be determined in accordance with Clause 601.6 by making trial mixes. Care
should be taken to prevent one fraction of aggregate falling into the other fraction of
the hopper of the feeding bin while loading the individual fraction of aggregates into
the bins.
3.2 Moisture content: The right amount of water for the lean concrete in the main work
shall be decided so as to ensure full compaction under rolling and shall be assessed
at the time of rolling the trial length. Too much water will cause the lean concrete to
be heaving up before the wheels and picked up on the wheels of the roller and too
little will lead to inadequate compaction, a low in-situ strength and an open-textured
surface.
119
The optimum water content shall be determined and demonstrated by rolling during
trial length construction and the optimum moisture content and degree of compaction
shall be got approved from Engineer. While laying in the main work, the lean
concrete shall have moisture content between the optimum and optimum +2 percent,
keeping in view the effectiveness of compaction achieved and to compensate for
evaporation losses.
3.3 Cement content: The minimum cement content in the lean concrete shall be 150
kg/cu.m of concrete. In case flyash is blended at site as part replacement of cement,
the quantity of flyash shall not be more than 20 percent by weight of OPC cement
and the content of OPC shall not be less than 135 kg/cu.m. If this minimum cement
content is not sufficient to produce concrete of the specified strength, it shall be
increased as necessary by the Contractor at his own cost.
3.4 Concrete strength: The average compressive strength of each consecutive group of
5 cubes made in accordance with MORT&H Clause 903.5.1.1 shall not be less than
10 MPa at 7 days. In addition, the minimum compressive strength of any individual
cube shall not be less than 7.5 MPa at 7 days. The design mix complying with the
above Clauses shall be got approved from the Engineer and demonstrated in the trial
length construction.
4) Sub-grade
The sub-grade shall conform to the grades and cross-sections shown on the drawings and
shall be uniformly compacted to the design strength in accordance with these Specifications.
The dry lean concrete sub-base shall not be laid on sub-grade softened by rain after its final
preparation; surface trenches and soft spots, if any, must be properly back-filled and
compacted to avoid any weak or soft spot. As far as possible, the construction traffic shall be
avoided on the prepared sub-grade. DLC shall not be laid directly on any sub-grade.
Dry Lean Concrete acting as sub-base to the Paving Quality Concrete (PQC) shall be laid
only on a granular sub-base/drainage layer as per Table 400-1. A day before placing of the
sub-base/drainage layer, the sub-grade surface shall be given a fine spray of water and
rolled with one or two passes of a smooth wheeled roller. If Engineer feels it necessary,
another fine spray of water may be applied just before placing drainage layer. If the sub
grade CBR is less than 8 percent, the sub grade shall be stabilized with lime, cement or any
other stabilizer accredited by IRC or by mechanical stabilization so as to raise the CBR to
not less than 15 percent in the field.
5) Construction
5.1 General: The pace and programmed of the Dry Lean Concrete (DLC) sub base
construction shall be matching suitably with the programme of construction of the
PQC over it. The DLC sub-base shall be overlaid with PQC only after 7 days of sub-
base construction.
5.2 Batching and mixing: The batching plant shall be capable of proportioning the
materials by weight, each type of material being weighed separately in accordance
with Clause 602.9.3.2. The cement from the bulk stock shall be weighed separately
from the aggregates. The capacity of batching and mixing plant shall be at least 25
percent higher than the proposed capacity for the laying arrangements. The batching
and mixing shall be carried out preferably in a forced action, central batching and
mixing plant having necessary automatic controls to ensure accurate proportioning
and mixing. Other types of mixing plant shall be permitted subject to demonstration of
120
their satisfactory performance during the trial length. The type and capacity of the
plant shall be got approved by the Engineer before commencement of the trial length.
The weighing balances shall be calibrated by weighing with large weighing machine
or in a weigh bridge. The accuracy of weighing scales of the batching plant shall be
within ±2 percent in the case of aggregates and ±1 percent in the case of cement, fly
ash, ground granulated slag and water.
The design features of Batching Plant should be such that the shifting operations of
the plant will not take long time when they are to be shifted from place to place with
the progress of the work.
5.3 Transporting: Plant mix lean concrete shall be discharged immediately from the
mixer, transported directly to the point where it is to be laid and protected from the
weather by covering the tipping trucks with tarpaulin during transit. The concrete shall
be transported by tipping trucks, sufficient in number to ensure a continuous supply
of material to feed the laying equipment to work at a uniform speed and in an
uninterrupted manner. The lead of the batching plant to paving site shall be such that
the travel time available from mixing to paving as specified in Clause 601.5.5.2 will
be adhered to. Tipping truck shall not have old concrete sticking to it. Each tipping
truck shall be washed with water jet before next loading as and where required after
inspection.
5.4 Placing: Lean concrete shall be placed by a paver with electronic sensor on sub-
base/base as per Clause 400. The equipment shall be capable of laying the material
in one layer in an even manner without segregation, so that after completion the total
thickness is as specified. The paving machine shall have high amplitude tamping
bars to give good initial compaction to the sub-base. One day before placing of the
dry lean cement concrete sub-base, the surface of the untreated granular sub-
base/drainage layer shall be given a fine spray of water and rolled with a smooth
wheeled roller.
The laying of a two-lane road sub-base may preferably be done in full width. In case
of Unavoidable situation lane by lane lying may be done. Preferably the lean
concrete shall be placed and compacted across the full width of the road, by
constructing it in one go or in two lanes paved forward simultaneously. No joints shall
normally be constructed in Dry Lean Concrete construction except in the following
situations.
Transverse butt type joint shall be provided at the end of the construction in a day.
Longitudinal construction joint shall be provided only when lane by lane construction
is done or in case of multiple lane exceeding two-lane, where pavers of adequate
width capable of paving in one go are not available. Transverse joints in PQC shall
not be co-terminus with the construction butt type joint of DLC. It shall be staggered
from the construction butt type joint in DLC by 800-1000 mm.
Longitudinal joint in DLC shall be similarly staggered by 300-400 mm from the

longitudinal joint of PQC.
The DLC shall be laid in such a way that it is at least 500 mm wider on each side
than the proposed width including paved shoulders of PQC.
121
5.5 Compaction
5.5.1 The compaction shall be carried out immediately after the material is laid and
levelled. In order to ensure thorough compaction, rolling shall be continued on the full
width till there is no further visible movement under the roller and the surface is
closed. The minimum dry density obtained shall be 98 percent of that achieved
during the trial length construction vide MORT&H Clause 601.7. The densities
achieved at the edges i.e. 0.5 m from the edge shall not be less than 96 percent of
that achieved during the trial construction vide MORT&H Clause 601.7.
5.5.2 The spreading, compacting and finishing of the lean concrete shall be carried out as
rapidly as possible and the operation shall be so arranged as to ensure that the time
between the mixing of the first batch of concrete in any transverse section of the
layer and the final finishing of the same shall not exceed 90 minutes when the
temperature of concrete is between 250C and 300C, and 120 minutes if less than
250C. This period may be reviewed by the Engineer in the light of the results of the
trial run but in no case shall it exceed 120 minutes. Work shall not proceed when the
temperature of the concrete exceeds 300C. If necessary, chilled water or addition of
ice may be resorted to for bringing down the temperature. It is desirable to stop
concreting when the ambient temperature is above 35°C. After compaction has been
completed, roller shall not stand on the compacted surface for the duration of the
curing period except during commencement of next day‟s work near the location
where work was terminated the previous day.
5.5.3 Double drum smooth-wheeled vibratory rollers of minimum 80 to 100 Kn static weight
are suitable for rolling dry lean concrete. In case any other roller is proposed, the
same shall be got approved from the Engineer, after demonstrating its performance.
The number of passes required to obtain maximum compaction depends on the
thickness of the dry lean concrete, the compatibility of the mix and the weight and
type of the roller used. In-Situ density in green concrete by sand replacement method
shall be determined and it will not be less 98 percent of the density in the trial length.
The requirement of number of rollers shall be determined from the scale of the work
to be undertake
5.5.4 In addition to the number of passes required (4-6) for compaction there shall be a
preliminary pass without vibration to bed the Dry Lean Concrete down and again a
final pass without vibration to remove roller marks and to smoothen the surface.
Special care and attention shall be exercised during compaction near joints, kerbs,
channels, side forms and around gullies and manholes. In case adequate
compaction is not achieved by the roller at these locations, use of plate vibrators
shall be made, if so directed by the Engineer.
5.5.5 The final lean concrete surface on completion of compaction and immediately before
overlaying shall be well closed, free from movement under roller and free from
ridges, low spots, cracks, loose material, pot holes, ruts or other defects. The final
surface shall be inspected immediately on completion and all loose, segregated or
defective areas shall be corrected by using fresh lean concrete material laid and
compacted as per Specifications. For repairing honeycombed/hungry surface,
concrete with aggregates of size 10 mm and below shall be spread and compacted.
It is necessary to check the level of the rolled surface for compliance. Any
level/thickness deficiency should be corrected after applying concrete with
aggregates of size 10 mm and below after roughening the surface. Similarly the
surface regularity also should be checked with 3 m straight edge.
122
5.5.6 Segregation of concrete in the tipping trucks shall be controlled by moving the
dumper back and forth while discharging the mix into the same or by any appropriate
means. Even paving operation shall be such that the mix does not segregate.
5.6 Joints: Construction and longitudinal joints shall be provided as per the drawings.
At longitudinal or transverse construction joints, unless vertical forms are used, the
edge of compacted material shall be cut back to a vertical plane where the correct
thickness of the properly compacted material has been obtained.
5.7 Curing: As soon as the lean concrete surface is compacted, curing shall commence.
One of the following two methods shall be adopted:
a) Where water is available, curing may be done by covering the surface by gunny
bags/hessian, which shall be kept wet continuously for 7 days by sprinkling
water.
b) Where water is scarce, one of the following may be used
i) The initial curing shall be done by spraying with white pigmented liquid
curing compound conforming to ASTM-C 309-81. The curing compound shall
be white pigmented or transparent type with water retention index of 90
percent when tested in accordance with BS:7542. Curing compound shall be
sprayed immediately after rolling is completed. As soon as the curing
compound has lost its tackiness, the surface shall be covered with wet
Hessian for four days.
ii) Wax-based white pigmented curing compound with water retention index of
90 percent shall be used to cure the dry lean concrete. The curing compound
shall conform to BS:7542. The compound shall be applied uniformly with a
mechanical sprayer and with a hood to protect the spray from the wind. The
curing compound shall be applied over the entire exposed surface of the
DLC, including sides and edges, at the rate of 0.2 liters/sq.m.
The first application, referred to as curing application shall be applied immediately

after the final rolling of DLC is completed. As soon as the curing compound loses
tackiness, the surface shall be covered with wet hessian for four days. The second
application of curing compound also referred to as the de bonding application, shall
be applied 24 to 48 hours prior to the PQC placement. Any damaged DLC shall be
corrected prior to the second application. Normally, the manufacturer‟s instructions
shall be followed for its application. After the second applications, no polythene
separation membrane may be required.
6) Trial Mixes
The Contractor shall make trial mixes of dry lean concrete with moisture contents like 5.0,
5.5, 6.0, 6.5 and 7.0 percent using cement content specified and the specified aggregate
grading but without violating the requirement of aggregate-cement ratio specified in Clause
601.3.1 of MoRTH. Optimum moisture and density shall be established by preparing cubes
(150 mm x 150 mm) with varying moisture contents. Compaction of the mix shall be done in
three layers with vibratory hammer fitted with a square or rectangular foot as described in
Clause 903.5.1.1 of MoRTH. After establishing the optimum moisture, a set of six cubes
shall be cast at that moisture for the determination of compressive strength on the third and
the seventh day. Trial mixes shall be repeated if the strength is not satisfactory either by
increasing cement content or using higher grade of cement. After the mix design is
approved, the Contractor shall construct a trial section in accordance with Clause 601.7 of
123
MoRTH. If during the construction of the trial length, the optimum moisture content
determined as above is found to be unsatisfactory, the Contractor may make suitable
changes in the moisture content to achieve the satisfactory mix. The cube specimens
prepared with the changed mix content should satisfy the strength requirement. Before
production of the mix, natural moisture content of the aggregate should be determined on a
day-to-day basis so that the moisture content could be adjusted. The mix finally designed
should neither stick to the rollers nor become too dry resulting in ravelling of surface.
7) Trial Length
7.1 The trial length shall be constructed at least 14 days in advance of the proposed date
of commencement of work. At least 30 days prior to the construction of the trial
length, the Contractor shall submit for the Engineer‟s approval a “Method Statement”
giving detailed description of the proposed materials, plant, equipment, mix
proportions, and procedure for batching, mixing, laying, compaction and other
construction procedures. The Engineer shall also approve the location and length of
trial construction which shall be a minimum of 100 m length laid in two days and for
full width of the pavement. The trial length shall contain the construction of at least
one transverse construction joint involving hardened concrete and freshly laid D.L.C.
sub-base. The construction of trial length shall be repeated till the Contractor proves
his ability to satisfactorily construct the D.L.C. sub-base.
7.2 Trial mixes shall be prepared as per Clause 601.6 in order to determine and
demonstrate the optimum moisture content which results in the maximum dry density
of the mix compacted by the rolling equipment and the minimum cement content that
is necessary to achieve the strength stipulated in the drawing.
7.3 After the construction of the trial length, the in-situ density of the freshly laid material
shall be determined by sand replacement method with 200 mm dia density cone.
Three density holes shall be made at locations equally spaced along a diagonal that
bisects the trial length, average of these densities shall be determined. These main
density holes shall not be made in the strip 500 mm from the edges. The average
density obtained from the three samples collected shall be the reference density and
is considered as 100 percent. The field density of regular work will be compared with
this reference density in accordance with MORT&H Clauses 601.5.5.1 and 903.5.1.2.
At least three (evenly spread) cores of minimum 100 mm dia per km shall be cut to
check segregation or any other deficiency like strength etc.
7.4 The hardened concrete shall be cut over 3 m width and reversed to inspect the
bottom surface for any segregation taking place. The trial length shall be constructed
after making necessary changes in the gradation of the mix to eliminate segregation
of the mix. The lower surface shall not have honey-combing and the aggregates shall
not be held loosely at the edges.
7.5 The trial length shall be outside the main works and shall not be less than 100 min
length; laid in two days. The main work shall not start until the trial length has been
approved by the Engineer. After approval has been given, the materials, mix
proportions, moisture content, mixing, lying, compaction plant and construction
procedures shall not be changed without the approval of the Engineer.
124
8) Tolerances for Surface Regularity, Level, Thickness, Density and Strength
The tolerances for surface regularity, level, thickness, density and strength shall conform to
the requirements given in MORT&H Clause 903.5. Control of quality of materials and works
shall be exercised by the Engineer in accordance with Section 900 of MORT&H
specification.
9) Traffic
No heavy commercial vehicles like trucks and buses shall be permitted on the dry lean
Concrete sub-base after its construction.
10) Measurement for Payment
The unit of measurement for dry lean concrete pavement shall be in cubic metre of concrete
placed, based on the net plan area for the specified thickness shown on the drawings or as
Rate
The Contract unit rate payable for dry lean concrete sub-base shall be for carrying out the
required operations including full compensation for all labour, materials and equipment,
mixing, transport, placing, compacting, finishing, curing, rectification of defective surface
testing and incidentals to complete the work as per Specifications, all royalties, fees, storage
and rents where necessary and all leads and lifts.
ITEM NO: 11
Construction of Continuously Reinforced Cement concrete Pavement in M - 30 Mix as
per approved mix design over a prepared sub-base, with cement content (Minimum
450 Kg per M3) as per approved mix design, course and fine aggregates conforming
to IS:383, maximum size of course aggregates not exceeding 25 mm, mixed in a
batching and mixing plant as per approved mix design, transported to site, laid with a
fixed form or slip form paver, spread, compacted and finished in a continuous
operation including necessary provision of Expansion, contraction, construction and
longitudinal joints, joint filler, 125 micron thick separation membrane of impermeable
Geo textile non- woven membrane, sealant primer, joint sealant, debonding strip,
Super plasticizer admixture IS marked as per 9103-1999 @ 0.5 per cent by weight of
cement as approved, finishing to lines and grades as per drawing & MoRTH
Specifications including curing of concrete for 14-days, maintenance of Diversion, all
required lead and lift, all taxes, royalty approval of mix design from consultant/client
excluding cost of reinforcement etc complete as directed and as per specification.
1) Scope
1.1 The work shall consist of construction of reinforced, dowel jointed, plain cement
concrete pavement in accordance with the requirements of these Specifications and
in conformity with the lines, grades and cross sections shown on the drawings. The
work shall include furnishing of all plant and equipment, materials and labour and
performing all operations in connection with the work, as approved by the Engineer.
1.2 The design parameters, viz., thickness of pavement slab, grade of concrete, joint
details etc. shall be as stipulated in the drawings.
125
2) Materials
2.1 Source of materials:
The Contractor shall indicate to the Engineer the source of all materials to be used in
the concrete work with relevant test data sufficiently in advance, and the approval of
the Engineer for the same shall be obtained at least 45 days before the scheduled
commencement of the work in trial length. If the Contractor subsequently proposes to
obtain materials from a different source during the execution of main work, he shall
notify the Engineer, with relevant test data, for his approval, at least 45 days before
such materials are to be used.
2.2 Cement:
Any of the following types of cement capable of achieving the design strength may be
used with prior approval of the Engineer.
Sr.No. Type Conforming to

i) Ordinary Portland cement 43 Grade IS: 8112
ii) Portland Slag Cement IS: 455
iii) Portland Pozzolana Cement IS: 1489-Part I
iv) Ordinary Portland cement 53 Grade IS: 12269
Note:
i. Fly ash up to 20 percent by weight of cement may be used in ordinary Portland
cement 53 Grade. No fly ash shall be used in any other grade of Cement other than
53 Grade. The fly ash shall conform to IS: 3812 (Part I).
ii. Ground Granulated Blast Furnace Slag (GGBFS) obtained by grinding granulated
slag conforming to IS: 12089. GGBFS shall not be used in any other grade of cement
except 53 grades. The content of GGBFS shall be up to 50 percent by weight of
Ordinary Portland Cement 53 grade.
iii. Site mixing of fly ash and ground granulated slag shall be permitted only after
ensuring availability of the equipments at site for uniform blending through a specific
mechanized facility with automated process control like batch mix plants conforming
to IS:4925 and IS:4926. Site mixing will not be allowed otherwise.
iv. Mix design will be done as per IRC: 44. The OPC content shall not be less than 310
kg/cu.m in case of blending at site. The curing period may be suitably enhanced by at
least about 2 days.
v. The Portland Pozzolana Cement produced in factory shall not have fly ash content
more than 25 percent. The Portland Pozzolana Cement produced in factory with fly
ash content more than 25 percent shall not be used. Certificate from the
manufacturer to this effect shall be procured before use.
If the soil around PQC has soluble salts like sulphates in excess of 0.5 percent, the cement
used shall be sulphate resistant and shall conform to IS: 12330.
Guidance may be taken from IRC: 44 for ascertaining the compressive/flexural strength of
cement concrete required to match with the prescribed design strength of concrete. Cement
to be used may preferably be obtained in bulk form. If cement in paper bags is proposed to
be used, there shall be bag-splitters with the facility to separate pieces of paper bags and
dispose them off suitably. No paper pieces shall enter the concrete mix. Bulk cement shall
be stored in accordance with Clause 1014. The cement shall be subjected to acceptance
test just prior to its use.
126
2.3 Chemical Admixtures:
Admixtures conforming to IS:9103 and IS:6925 shall be permitted to improve
workability of the concrete or extension of setting time, on satisfactory evidence that
they will not have any adverse effect on the properties of concrete with respect to
strength, volume change, durability and have no deleterious effect on steel bars. The
particulars of the admixture and the quantity to be used must be furnished to the
Engineer in advance to obtain his approval before use. Satisfactory performance of
the admixtures should be proved both on the laboratory concrete trial mixes and in
the trial length paving. If air entraining admixture is used, the total quantity of air in
air-entrained concrete as a percentage of the volume of the mix shall be 5±1.5
percent for 31.5 mm nominal size aggregate.
2.3.1 Fibers:
Fibers may be used subject to the provision in the design/approval by the Engineer to
reduce the shrinkage cracking and post-cracking. The fibers may be steel fiber as per
IRC: SP: 46 or polymeric Synthetic Fibers within the following range of specifications:
 Effective Diameter 10 micron – 1.0 mm

 Length 6-48 mm
 Specific gravity more than 1.0
 Suggested dosage 0.6-2.0 kg/cu.m (0.2 -0.6 % by weight of cement in mix). Usage
will be regulated as stipulated in IRC: 44/IS: 456 or any other specialist literature.
 Water absorption less than 0.45 percent
 Melting point of this fiber shall not be less than 160°C.
 The aspect ratio generally varies from 200 to 2000.
 These synthetic fibers will have good alkali and UV light resistance.
When fibers are used, the mix shall be so designed that the slump at paving concrete is
30±15 mm site.
2.4 Aggregates
2.4.1 Aggregates for pavement concrete shall be natural material complying with IS: 383
but with a Los Angeles Abrasion Test result not more than 35 percent. The limits of
deleterious materials shall not exceed the requirements set out in Table 600-2.
The aggregates shall be free from chert, flint, chalcedony or other silica in a form that
can react with the alkalies in the cement. In addition, the total chlorides content
expressed as chloride ion content shall not exceed 0.06 percent by weight and the
total sulphate content expressed as sulphuric anhydride (SO3) shall not exceed 0.25
percent by weight. In case the Engineer considers that the aggregates are not free
from dirt, the same may be washed and drained for at least 72 hours before batching,
as directed by the Engineer.
2.4.2 Coarse aggregates:
Coarse aggregates shall consist of clean, hard, strong, dense, non-porous and
durable pieces of crushed stone or crushed gravel and shall be devoid of pieces of
disintegrated stone, soft, flaky, elongated, very angular or splintery pieces. The
maximum size of coarse aggregate shall not exceed 31.5 mm for pavement concrete.
Continuously graded aggregates shall be used as per Table 600-1, No aggregate
which has water absorption more than 2 percent shall be used in the concrete mix.
The aggregates shall be tested for soundness in accordance with IS: 2386 (Part-5).
127
After 5 cycles of testing, the loss shall not be more than 12 percent if sodium
sulphate solution is used or 18 percent if magnesium sulphate solution is used. The
combined flakiness and elongation index of aggregate shall not be more than 35
percent.
Dumping and stacking of aggregates shall be done in an approved manner.
2.4.3 Fine aggregates:
The fine aggregates shall consist of clean natural sand or crushed stone sand or a
combination of the two and shall conform to IS: 383. Fine aggregate shall be free
from soft particles, clay, shale, loam, cemented particles, mica and organic and other
foreign matter.
Table 600-2 Permissible Limits of Deleterious Substances in Fine And Coarse

Aggregates
Sl. Deleterious Method of Fine Aggregate Coarse Aggregate

Substance Test Percentage percentage by Weight
by Weight, (Max) (Max)
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)
Uncrushed* Crushed Uncrushed* Crushed
i) Coal and lignite IS:2386 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
(PartII)-
1963
ii) Clay lumps do 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
iii) Materials finer than IS:2386 3.00 8.00 3.00 3.00
75 µ IS Sieve (PartI)-1963
iv) Soft fragments IS:2386 - - 3.00 -
(PartI)-1963
v) Shale IS:2386 1.00 - - -

(PartI)-1963
vi) Total of percentages - 5.00 2.00 5.00 5.00

of all deleterious
materials (except
mica) including Sl
No. (i) To (v) for col
4, 6 and 7 and Sl No.
(i) and (ii) for col 5
only
* Crushed aggregate at least one face fractured
Note: The presence of mica in the fine aggregate has been found to reduce considerably the
durability and compressive strength of concrete and further investigations are underway to
determine the extent of the deleterious effect of mica. It is advisable, therefore, to investigate
the mica content of fine aggregate and make suitable allowances for the possible reduction
in the strength of concrete or mortar; in cases where the stretch of the project road passes
through micacious belt.
128
2.5 Water:
Water used for mixing and curing of concrete shall be clean and free from injurious
amount of oil, salt, acid, vegetable matter or other substances harmful to the finished
concrete. It shall meet the requirements stipulated in IS: 456.
2.6 Mild steel bars for dowels and tie bars:
i) Owel Bar shall be of plain mild steel conforming to IS: 432 and will have yield
stress of Fe-240.
ii) Tie bar shall be of TMT steel conforming to IS: 1786 and will have yield stress
of Fe-500.
2.7 Pre moulded joint filler:
Joint filler board for expansion joints shall be used only at abutting structures like
bridges and shall be of 20-25 mm thickness within a tolerance of ± 1.5 mm and of a
firm compressible material and complying with the requirements of IS:1838, or
BS:2630 “Preformed Joint Filler”. It shall be 25 mm less in depth than the thickness
of the slab within a tolerance of ± 3 mm and provided to the full width between the
side forms. It shall be in suitable lengths which shall not be less than one lane width.
Holes to accommodate dowel bars shall be accurately bored or punched out to give a
sliding fit on the dowel bars.
2.8 Joint sealing compound:
The joint sealing compound shall be of hot poured, electrometric type or cold
polysulphide / polyurethane / silicon type having flexibility, resistance to age
hardening and durability as per IRC: 57. Manufacturer‟s certificate shall be produced
by the Contractor for establishing that the sealant is not more than six months old
and stating that the sealant complies with the relevant standard as in Clause 602.2.8.
The samples shall meet the requirements as mentioned in IRC: 57. Hot applied
sealant shall be as per IS: 1834. Cold poured sealant shall be as under:
i) Polysulphide BS: 5212, IS: 11433

ii) Polyurethane BS: 5212
iii) Silicon ASTM 5893-96
2.9 Storage of materials:
All materials shall be stored in accordance with the provisions of Clause 1014 of the
Specifications and other relevant IS Specifications. All efforts must be made to store
the materials in proper places so as to prevent their deterioration or contamination by
foreign matter and to ensure their satisfactory quality and fitness for the work. The
platform where aggregates are stock piled shall be on a levelled platform elevated
from the ground at least by 150 mm. This platform will be a pucca paved platform.
The area shall have slope and drain to drain off rain water. The storage space must
also permit easy inspection, removal and storage of the materials. Aggregates of
different sizes shall be stored in partitioned stack-yards. All such materials even
though stored in approved godowns must be subjected to acceptance test as per
MORT&H Clause 903 of these Specifications immediately prior to their use.
129
3) Proportioning of Concrete
3.1 After approval by the Engineer of all the materials to be used in the concrete, the
Contractor shall submit the mix design based on weighed proportions of all
ingredients for the approval of the Engineer. The mix design shall be submitted at
least 30 days prior to the paving of trial length and the design shall be based on
laboratory trial mixes using the approved materials and methods as per IRC:44 or
IS:10262 (Recommended Guidelines for Mix Design). The target mean strength for
the design mix shall be determined as indicated in MORT&H Clause 602.3.3.1. The
mix design shall be based on the flexural strength of concrete.
3.2 Cement content:

When Ordinary Portland Cement (OPC) is used the quantity of cement shall not be
less than 450 kg/cu.m. If this minimum cement content is not sufficient to produce
concrete of the specified strength, it shall be increased as necessary by the
Contractor at his own cost.
3.3 Concrete strength:
3.3.1 The characteristic flexural strength of concrete shall not be less than 4.5 MPa (M 40
Grade). Target mean flexural strength for mix design shall be more than 4.5 MPa +
1.65*s, where s is standard deviation of flexural strength derived by conducting test
on minimum 30 beams. While designing the mix in the laboratory, correlation
between flexural and compressive strengths of concrete shall be established on the
basis of at least thirty tests on samples. However, quality control in the field shall be
exercised on the basis of flexural strength. It may, however, be ensured that the
materials and mix proportions remain substantially unaltered during the daily
concrete production. The water content shall be the minimum required to provide the
agreed workability for full compaction of the concrete to the required density as
determined by the trial mixes or as approved by the Engineer and the maximum free
water cement ratio shall be 0.45 when only OPC is used and 0.50 when blended
cement (Portland Pozzolana Cement or Portland Slag Cement or OPC blended with
fly ash or Ground Granulated Blast Furnance Slag at site) is used.
3.3.2 The ratio between the 7 and 28 day strength shall be established for the mix to be
used in the slab in advance, by testing pairs of beams and cubes at each stage on at
least six batches of trial mix. The average strength of the 7 day cured specimens
shall be divided by the average strength of the 28 day specimens for each batch, and
the ratio “R‟ shall be determined. The ratio „R‟ shall be expressed to three decimal
places.
If during the construction of the trial length or during some normal working, the
average value of any four consecutive 7 day test results falls below the required 7
day strength as derived from the value of „R‟ then the cement content of the concrete
shall, without extra payment, be increased by 5 percent by weight or by an amount
agreed by the Engineer. The increased cement content shall be maintained at least
until the four corresponding 28 day strengths have been assessed for in conformity
with the requirements as per MoRTH Clause 602.3.1. Whenever the cement content
is increased, the concrete mix shall be adjusted to maintain the required workability.
3.4 Workability
3.4.1 The workability of the concrete at the point of placing shall be adequate for the
concrete to be fully compacted and finished without undue flow. The optimum
130
workability for the mix to suit the paving plant being used shall be determined by the
Contractor and approved by the Engineer. The control of workability in the field shall
be exercised by the slump test as per IS: 1199.
3.4.2 The workability requirement at the batching and mixing plant and paving site shall be
established by slump tests carried during trial paving. These requirements shall be
established from season to season and also when the lead from batching and mixing
plant site to the paving site changes. The workability shall be established for the type
of paving equipment available. A slump value in the range of 30 ± 15 mm is
reasonable for paving works but this may be modified depending upon the site
requirement and got approved by the Engineer. These tests shall be carried out on
every truck/dumper at batching and mixing plant site and paving site initially when the
work commences but subsequently the frequency can be reduced to alternate trucks
or as per the instructions of the Engineer.
3.5 Design mix
3.5.1 The Contractor shall carry out laboratory trials of design mix with the materials from
the approved sources to be used. Trial mixes shall be made in presence of the
Engineer or his representative and the design mix shall be subject to the approval of
the Engineer. They shall be repeated, if necessary, until the proportions that will
produce a concrete which complies in all respects with these Specification, and
conform to the requirements of the design/drawings.
3.5.2 The proportions determined as a result of the laboratory trial mixes may be adjusted,
if necessary, during the construction of the trial length. Thereafter, neither the
materials nor the mix proportions shall be varied in any way except with the written
approval of the Engineer.
3.5.3 Any change in the source of materials or mix proportions proposed by the Contractor
during the course of work shall be assessed by making laboratory trial mixes and the
construction of a further trial length unless approval is given by the Engineer for
minor adjustments like compensation for moisture content in aggregates or minor
fluctuations in the grading of aggregate.
4) Sub-base
The cement concrete pavement shall be laid over the DLC sub-base constructed in
accordance with the relevant drawings and Specifications contained in MORT&H Clause
601. The DLC will be laid on GSB as per MORT&H Clause 400. If the DLC sub-base is
found damaged at some places or it has cracks wider than 10 mm, it shall be repaired with
fine cement concrete or bituminous concrete before laying separation membrane layer. Prior
to laying of concrete it shall be ensured that the separation membrane as per MORT&H
Clause 602.5 is placed in position and the same is clean of dirt or other extraneous materials
and free from any damage.
Mixing and Granular sub base material or in a pug mill shall be done mechanically in a
separate yard through motor grader to ensure uniform mixing. Mix-in-place method will
normally not be allowed except in exceptional situation, with the approval of the Engineer.
The DLC sub-base/WMM/base (treated with cement etc.) of grading specified in the Contract
shall be spread on the prepared sub-grade with the help of a motor grader of adequate
capacity, its blade having hydraulic controls suitable for initial adjustment and for maintaining
the required slope and grade during the operation or other means as approved by the
131
Engineer. The surface levels and surface regularity shall be as per provision contained in
IRC: SP: 16.
Emerging literature suggests alternative for both DLC and separation membrane. Due to
lack of indigeneous experience available, the same are not provided in these Specifications.
It is, however, felt that these alternative Specifications may be tried at least on experimental
basis, by consulting specialist literature. Some of such possible alternatives are laying PQC
on base course like WMM, soil treated with cement (cementitious material) as instead of
DLC. Design of PQC in such cases, shall include checking against pumping/erosion besides
fatigue. Two courses of wax based curing compound or two coats of bitumen or 5 mm thick
non-woven geo-fabric sheet, instead of
Polythene film is some of the emerging alternatives for membrane.
DLC sub-base shall be laid with paver and not with grader.
5) Separation Membrane
A separation membrane shall be used between the concrete slab and the sub-base.
Separation membrane shall be impermeable PVC sheet 125 micron thick transparent or
white in colour laid flat with minimum creases. Before placing the separation membrane, the
sub-base shall be swept clean of all the extraneous materials using air compressor.
Wherever overlap of plastic sheets is necessary, the same shall be at least 300 mm and any
damaged sheathing shall be replaced at the Contractor‟s cost. The separation membrane
may be nailed to the lower layer with concrete nails.
6) Joints
6.1 The locations and type of joints shall be as shown in the drawing. Joints shall be
constructed depending upon their functional requirement. The location of the joints
should be transferred accurately at the site and mechanical saw cutting of joints done
as per stipulated dimensions. It shall be ensured that the required depth of cut is
made from edge-to-edge of the pavement. Transverse and longitudinal joints in the
pavement (PQC) and DLC sub-base shall be staggered so that they are not
coincident vertically and are at least 800 to 1000 mm and 300 to 400 mm apart
respectively. Sawing of joints shall be carried out with diamond studded blades soon
after the concrete has hardened to take the load of the sawing machine and
personnel without damaging the texture of the pavement.
Sawing operation could start as early as 5-6 hours after laying of PQC but not later
than 18 to 20 hours depending upon the ambient temperature, wind velocity and
relative humidity and required maturity of concrete achieved for this purpose.
When the kerb is cast integrally with the main pavement slab, the joint cutting shall
also be extended to the kerb.
When on instructions of the Engineer, the use of maturity meter is specified; sawing
should not be initiated when the compressive strength of the concrete is less than 2
MPa and should be completed before it attains the compressive strength of 7 MPa.
6.2 Transverse joints
6.2.1 Transverse joints shall be contraction and expansion joints constructed at the
spacing described in the drawings. Transverse joints shall be straight within the
following tolerances along the intended line of joints which is the straight line
132
transverse to the longitudinal axis of the carriageway at the position proposed by the
Contractor and agreed to by the Engineer, except at road junctions or roundabouts
where the position shall be as described in the drawings:
i) Deviations of the filler board in the case of expansion joints from the intended line
of the joint shall not be greater than ± 10 mm.
ii) The best fit straight line through the joint grooves as constructed shall be not
more than 25 mm from the intended line of the joint.
iii) Deviations of the joint groove from the best fit straight line of the joint shall not be
greater than 10 mm.
iv) Transverse joints on each side of the longitudinal joint shall be in line with each
other and of the same type and width. Transverse joints shall have a sealing
groove which shall be sealed in compliance with MORT&H Clause 602.11.
6.2.2 Contraction joints:
The contraction joints shall be placed transversely at pre-specified locations as per

drawings/design using dowel bars. These joints shall be cut as soon as the concrete
has undergone initial hardening and is hard enough to take the load of joint sawing
machine without causing damage to the slab.
Contraction joints shall consist of a mechanical sawn joint groove, 3 to 5 mm wide

and ¼th to rd depth of the slab ± 5 mm or as stipulated in the drawings and dowel
bars complying with MORT&H Clause 602.6.5.
Contraction joint shall be widened subsequently accommodate the sealant as per

MORT&H Clause 602.11, to dimensions shown on drawings or as per IRC: 57.
6.2.3 Expansion joints:
The expansion joints shall consist of a joint filler board complying with MORT&H
Clause 602.2.7 and dowel bars complying with MORT&H Clause 602.6.5 and as
detailed in the drawings. The filler board shall be positioned vertically with the
prefabricated joint assemblies along the line of the joint within the tolerances given in
Clause MORT&H 602.6.2.1 and at such depth below the surface as will not impede
the passage of the finishing straight edges or oscillating beams of the paving
machines. The adjacent slabs shall be completely separated from each other by
providing joint filler board. Space around the dowel bars, between the sub-base and
the filler board shall be packed with a suitable compressible material to block the flow
of cement slurry.
6.3 Transverse construction joint:
Transverse construction joint shall be placed whenever concreting is completed after

a day‟s work or is suspended for more than 30 minutes. These joints shall be
provided at location of constructing joints using dowel bars. The construction joints
may preferably coincide with the pre-specified location of construction joints by
properly planning the day to day concreting work of PQC. The joint shall be made
butt type. At all construction joints, steel bulk heads shall be used to retain the
concrete while the surface is finished. The surface of the concrete laid subsequently
shall conform to the grade and cross sections of the previously laid pavement. When
positioning of bulk head/stop-end is not possible, concreting to an additional 1 or 2 m
length may be carried out to enable the movement of joint cutting machine so that
joint grooves may be cut and the extra 1 or 2 m length is cut out and removed
subsequently after concrete has hardened.
133
Like contraction joint, the construction joint shall also be widened to dimensions
shown on drawing or as per IRC: 57, not before 14 days curing of PQC.
6.4 Longitudinal joint
6.4.1 The longitudinal joints shall be saw cut as per details of the joints shown in the
drawing or as per dimensions given in IRC: 57. The groove may be cut after the final
set of the concrete. Joints should be sawn to at least rd the depth of the slab ±5 mm
as indicated in the drawing.
6.4.2 Tie bars shall be provided at the longitudinal joints as per dimensions and spacing
shown in the drawing and in accordance with MORT&H Clause 602.6.6.
Longitudinal joint shall also be widened to dimensions shown on drawing or as per

IRC: 57, not before 14 days curing of PQC.
6.5 Dowel bars
6.5.1 Dowel bars shall be mild steel rounds in accordance with Clause MORT&H 602.2.6
with details/dimensions as indicated in the drawings and free from oil, dirt, loose rust
or scale. They shall be straight, free of irregularities and burring restricting slippage in
the concrete. The sliding ends shall be sawn or cropped cleanly with no protrusions
outside the normal diameter of the bar. To remove any protrusions, the ends of the
dowel bars shall be suitably grounded. The dowel bar shall be supported on
cradles/dowel chairs in pre-fabricated joint assemblies positioned prior to the
construction of the slabs or mechanically inserted with vibration into the plastic
concrete by a method which ensures correct placement of the bars besides full re-
compaction of the concrete around the dowel bars. Modern slip form pavers are
equipped with automatic dowel bar inserter (DBI).
6.5.2 Unless shown otherwise on the drawings, dowel bars shall be positioned at mid
depth of the slab within a tolerance of ±20 mm, and centered equally about intended
lines of the joint within a tolerance of ±25 mm. They shall be aligned parallel to the
finished surface of the slab and to the centre line of the carriageway and to each
other within tolerances given hereunder, the compliance of which shall be checked
as per MORT&H Clause 602.10.7.
i) For bars supported on cradles prior to the laying of the slab:
a) All bars in a joint shall be within ±3 mm per 300 mm length of bar

b) 2/3rd of the number of bars shall be within ±2 mm per 300 mm length of bar
c) No bar shall differ in alignment from an adjoining bar by more than 3 mm per 300 mm
length of bar in either the horizontal or vertical plane
d) Cradles supporting dowel bar shall not extend across the line of joint i.e. no steel bar
of the cradle assembly shall be continuous across the joint.
ii) For all bars inserted after laying of the slab the tolerance for alignment may be
twice as indicated in (i) above.
6.5.3 Dowel bars, supported on cradles in assemblies, when subject to a load of 110 N
applied at either end and in either the vertical or horizontal direction (upwards and
134
downwards and both directions horizontally) shall conform to be within the limits
given in MORT&H Clause 602.6.5.2.
6.5.4 The assembly of dowel bars and supporting cradles, including the joint filler board in
the case of expansion joints, shall have the following degree of rigidity when fixed in
position:-
i) For expansion joints, the deflection of the top edge of the filler board shall be not
greater than 13 mm, when a load of 1.3 kN is applied perpendicular to the vertical
face of the joint filler board and distributed over a length of 600 mm by means of a
bar or timber packing, at mid depth and midway between individual fixings, or 300
mm from either end of any length of filler board, if a continuous fixing is used. The
residual deflection after load shall be not more than 3 mm.
ii) The joint assembly fixing to sub-base shall not fail under the 1.3 kN load applied for
testing the rigidity of the assembly but shall fail before the load reaches 2.4 kN.
iii) The fixings for contraction joint shall not fail under 1.3 kN load and shall fail before
the load reaches 2.6 kN when applied over a length of 600 mm by means of a bar or
timber packing placed as near to the level of the line of fixings as practicable.
iv) Fixings shall be deemed to fail when there is displacement of the assemblies by
more than 3 mm with any form of fixing, under the test load. The displacement shall
be measured at the nearest part of the assembly to the centre of the bar or timber
packing.
6.5.5 Dowel bars in the contraction joints, construction joints and expansion joints shall be
covered by a thin plastic sheath. The sheath shall be not more than 125 micron thick
and shall be tightly fitted on the bar for at least two-thirds of the length from one end
for dowel bars in contraction joints or half the length plus 50 mm for expansion joints.
The sheathed bar shall comply with the following pull-out tests:
i) Four bars shall be taken at random from stock and without any special preparation
shall be covered by sheaths as required in this Clause. The ends of the dowel bars
which have been sheathed shall be cast centrally into concrete specimens 150 mm x
150 mm x 600 mm, made of the same mix proportions to be used in the pavement,
but with a maximum nominal aggregate size of 20 mm and cured in accordance with
IS:516. At 7 days a tensile load shall be applied to achieve a movement of the bar of
at least 0.25 mm. The average bond stress to achieve this movement shall not be
greater than 0.14 MPa.
6.5.6 For expansion joints, a closely fitting cap 100 mm long consisting of waterproofed
cardboard or an approved synthetic material like PVC or GI pipe shall be placed over
the sheathed end of each dowel bar. An expansion space (about 25 mm) at least
equal in length to the thickness of the joint filler board shall be formed between the
end of the cap and the end of the dowel bar by using compressible sponge. To block
the entry of cement slurry between dowels and cap it shall be taped.
6.6 Tie bars
6.6.1 Tie bars in longitudinal joints shall be deformed steel bars of strength 500 MPa
complying with IS: 1786 and in accordance with the requirements given in this
Clause. The bars shall be free from oil, dirt, loose rust and scale.
135
6.6.2 Tie bars projecting across the longitudinal joint shall be protected from corrosion for
75 mm on each side of the joint by a protective coating of bituminous paint with the
approval of the Engineer. The coating shall be dry when the tie bars are used. In the
case of coastal region, tie bars shall be epoxy coated as per IS: 13620.
6.6.3 Tie bars in longitudinal joints shall be made up into rigid assemblies with adequate
supports and fixings to remain firmly in position during the construction of the slab.
Alternatively, tie bars at longitudinal joints may be mechanically or manually inserted
into the plastic concrete from above by vibration using a method which ensures
correct placements of the bars and re compaction of the concrete around the tie bars.
The modern slip form pavers are equipped with automatic tie bar inserter (TBI).
6.6.4 Tie bars shall be positioned to remain within the upper middle third of the slab depth
as indicated in the drawings and approximately parallel to the surface and
approximately perpendicular to the line of the joint, with the centre of each bar on the
intended line of the joints within a tolerance of ±50 mm, and with a minimum cover of
30 mm below the joint groove.
7) Weather and Seasonal Limitations
7.1 Concreting during monsoon months:
Concreting should be avoided during rainy season. However, when concrete is being
placed during monsoon months and when it may be expected to rain, sufficient
supply of tarpaulin or other waterproof cloth shall be provided along the line of the
work. Any time when it rains, all freshly laid concrete which had not been covered for
curing purposes shall be adequately protected. Any concrete damaged by rain shall
be removed and replaced. If the damage is limited to texture, it shall be retextured in
accordance with the directions of the Engineer.
7.2 Temperature limitation
No concreting shall be done when the concrete temperature is above 30°C. Besides,
in adverse conditions like high temperature, low relative humidity, excessive wind
velocity, imminence of rains etc., tents on mobile trusses may be provided over the
freshly laid concrete for a minimum period of 3 hours as directed by the Engineer.
The temperature of the concrete mix on reaching the paving site shall not be more
than 30°C. To bring down the temperature, if necessary, chilled water or ice flakes
should be made use of. When the ambient temperature is more than 350C, no
concreting shall be permitted.
No concreting shall be done when the concrete temperature is below 50C and the
temperature is further falling.
8) Side Forms, Rails and Guide wires
8.1 Side forms and rails:
These shall be provided in case of fixed form paving. All side forms shall be of mild
steel of depth equal to the thickness of pavement or slightly less to accommodate the
surface regularity of the sub-base. The forms can be placed in series of steel packing
plates or shims to take care of irregularity of sub-base. They shall be sufficiently
robust and rigid to support the weight and pressure caused by paving equipment.
136
Side forms for use with wheeled paving machines shall incorporate metal rails firmly
fixed at a constant height below the top of the forms. The forms and rails shall be
firmly secured in position by not less than 3 stakes/pins for every 3 m length so as to
prevent movement in any direction. Forms and rails shall be straight within a
tolerance of 3 mm in 3 m and when in place shall not settle in excess of 1.5 mm in 3
m while paving is being done. Forms shall be cleaned and oiled immediately before
each use. The forms shall be bedded on a continuous bed of low moisture content
lean cement mortar or concrete and set to the line and levels shown on the drawings
within tolerances ±10 mm and ±3 mm respectively. The bedding shall not extend
under the slab and there shall be no vertical step between adjacent forms of more
than 3 mm. The forms shall be got inspected by the Engineer for his approval before
12 hours on the day before the construction of the slab and shall not be removed
until at least 12 hours afterwards.
8.2 At all times sufficient forms shall be used and set to the required alignment for at
least 300 m length of pavement immediately in advance of the paving operations, or
the anticipated length of pavement to be laid within the next 24 hours whichever is
more.
8.3 Use of guide wires
8.3.1 Where slip form paving is proposed, a guide wire shall be provided along both sides
of the slab. Each guide wire shall be at a constant height above and parallel to the
required edges of the slab as described in the contract/drawing within a vertical
tolerance of ±3 mm. Additionally, one of the wires shall be kept at a constant
horizontal distance from the required edge of the pavement as indicated in the
contract drawing within a lateral tolerance of ±10 mm.
8.3.2 The guide wires shall be supported on stakes not more than 6 m apart by connectors
capable of fine horizontal and vertical adjustment. The guide wire shall be tensioned
on the stakes so that a 500 gm weight shall produce a deflection of not more than 20
mm when suspended at the mid point between any pair of stakes. The ends of the
guide wires shall be anchored to fixing point or winch and not on the stakes. On the
curves, the stakes shall be fixed at not more than 3 m centre-to-centre.
8.3.3 The stakes shall be positioned and hammered into the ground and the connectors
will be maintained at their correct height and alignment from 12 hours on the day
before concreting takes place until 12 hours after finishing of the concrete.
The guide wire shall be erected and tensioned on the connectors at any section for at
least 2 hours before concreting that section.
8.3.4 The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for his approval of line and level, the
stakes and connectors which are ready for use in the length of road to be constructed
by 12 hours on the working day before the day of construction of slab. Any
deficiencies noted by the Engineer shall be rectified by the Contractor who shall then
re-apply for approval of the affected stakes. Work shall not proceed until the
Engineer has given his approval. It shall be ensured that the stakes and guide wires
are not affected by the construction equipment when concreting is in progress.
137
9) Construction
9.1 General:
A systems approach may be adopted for construction of the pavement, and the
Method Statement for carrying out the work, detailing all the activities, indication of
time-cycle, equipment, personnel etc., shall be got approved from the Engineer
before the commencement of the work. This shall include the type, capacity and
make of the batching and mixing plant besides the hauling arrangement and paving
equipment. The capacity of paving equipment, batching plant as well as all the
ancillary equipment shall be adequate for a paving rate of at least 500 m in one day.
The desirable paving speed of slip form pavers is 1.0 m per minute, but it shall not be
less than 0.6 m per minute average. The concreting should proceed continuously
without stop & start.
9.2 Batching and mixing:
Batching and mixing of the concrete shall be done at a central batching and mixing
plant with automatic controls, located at a suitable place which takes into account
sufficient space for stockpiling of cement, aggregates and stationary water tanks.
This shall be, however, situated at an approved distance, duly considering the
properties of the mix and the transporting arrangements available with the
Contractor.
The dose of plasticizer/super plasticizer shall be added in the end of input of all
ingredients i.e. when cement, aggregate, fly ash and water etc. have been thoroughly
mixed. Proper dispersal of plasticizer/super plasticizer and air entraining agent (when
used) shall be ensured.
Tipping trucks shall be washed at a regular frequency as prescribed by the Engineer

to ensure that no left-over mix of previous loading remains stuck. Desirably each
tipping truck shall be washed with water jet before next loading.
9.3 Equipment for proportioning of materials and paving
9.3.1 Proportioning of materials shall be done in the batching plant by weight, each type of
material being weighed separately. The cement from the bulk stock may be weighed
separately from the aggregates. Water shall be measured by volume. Specified
percentage of plasticizer in volume will be added by weight of cement. Wherever
properly graded aggregate of uniform quality cannot be maintained as envisaged in
the mix design, the grading of aggregates shall be controlled by appropriate blending
techniques. The capacity of batching and mixing plant shall be at least 25 percent
higher than the proposed capacity of the laying/paving equipment.
9.3.2 Batching plant and equipment:
1) General: The batching plant shall include minimum four bins, weighing hoppers, and
scales for the fine aggregates and for each size of coarse aggregate. If cement is
used in bulk, a separate scale for cement shall be included. The weighing hoppers
shall be properly sealed and vented to preclude dust during operation. Approved
safety devices shall be provided and maintained for the protection of all personnel
engaged in plant operation, inspection and testing. The batch plant shall be equipped
with a suitable non- resettable batch counter which will correctly indicate the number
of batches proportioned.
138
2) Bins and hoppers: Bins with minimum number of four adequate separate
compartments shall be provided in the batching plant.
3) Automatic weighing devices: Batching plant shall be equipped to proportion

aggregates and bulk cement by means of automatic weighing devices using load
cells.
4) Mixer: Mixers shall be pan type, reversible type or any other mixer capable of
combining the aggregates, cement, and water into a thoroughly mixed and uniform
mass within the specified mixing period, and of discharging the mix, without
segregation. Each stationary mixer shall be equipped with an approved timing device
which will automatically lock the discharge lever when the drum has been charged
and release it at the end of the mixing period. The device shall be equipped with a
bell or other suitable warning device adjusted to give a clearly audible signal each
time the lock is released. In case of failure of the timing device, the mixer may be
used for the balance of the day while it is being repaired, provided that each batch is
mixed in 90 seconds or as per the manufacturer‟s recommendation. The mixer shall
be equipped with a suitable non-resettable batch counter which shall correctly
indicate the number of batches mixed. The mixers shall be cleaned at suitable
intervals. The pick up and throw-over blades in the drum or drums shall be repaired
or replaced when they are worn down 20 mm or more. The Contractor shall (1) have
available at the job site a copy of the manufacturer‟s design, showing dimensions
and arrangements of blades in reference to original height and depth, or (2) provide
permanent marks on blade to show points of 20 mm wear from new conditions.
Drilled holes of 5 mm diameter near each end and at midpoint of each blade are
recommended. Batching Plant shall be calibrated in the beginning and thereafter at
suitable interval not exceeding 1 month.
5) Control cabin : An air-conditioned centralized computer control cabin shall be

provided for automatic operation of the equipment.
9.3.3 Paving equipment:
The concrete shall be placed with an approved fixed form or slip form paver with
independent units designed to (i) spread, (ii) consolidate, screed and flat-finish, (iii)
texture and cure the freshly placed concrete in one complete pass of the machine in
such a manner that a minimum of hand finishing will be necessary and so as to
provide a dense and homogeneous pavement in conformity with the plans and
Specifications. The paver shall be equipped with electronic sensor controls to control
the line and grade from either or both sides of the machine.
Vibrators shall operate at a frequency of 8000-10000 impulses per minute under load
at a maximum spacing of 600 mm. The variable vibration setting shall be provided in
the machine.
9.3.4 Concrete saw:
The Contractor shall provide adequate number of concrete saws with sufficient
number of diamond-edge saw blades. The saw machine shall be either electric or
petrol/diesel driven type. A water tank with flexible hoses and pump shall be made
available in this activity on priority basis. The Contractor shall have at least one
standby saw in good working condition. The concreting work shall not commence if
the saws are not in working condition.
139
9.4 Hauling and placing of concrete
9.4.1 Freshly mixed concrete from the central batching and mixing plant shall be
transported to the paver site by means of tipping trucks of sufficient capacity and
approved design in sufficient numbers to ensure a constant supply of concrete.
Covers shall be used for protection of concrete against the weather. While loading
the concrete trucks shall be moved back and forth under the discharge chute to
prevent segregation. The tipping trucks shall be capable of maintaining the mixed
concrete in a homogeneous state and discharging the same without segregation and
loss of cement slurry. The feeding to the paver is to be regulated in such a way that
the paving is done in an uninterrupted manner with a uniform speed throughout the
day‟s work.
9.4.2 Placing of concrete
Concrete mixed in central mixing plant shall be transported to the site without delay
and the concrete which, in the opinion of the Engineer has been mixed too long
before laying will be rejected and shall be removed from the site.
The total time taken from the addition of the water to the mix, until the completion of
the surface finishing and texturing shall not exceed 120 minutes when concrete
temperature is less than 25°C and 90 minutes when the concrete temperature is
between 25°C and 30°C. Tipping trucks delivering concrete shall normally not run on
plastic sheathing nor shall they run on completed slabs until after 28 days of placing
the concrete.
The placing of concrete in front of the PQC paver should preferably be from the side
placer to avoid damage to DLC by concrete tipping trucks. In case of unavoidable
situation, truck supplying PQC concrete to the paver may be allowed to ply on the
DLC with the approval of the Engineer. The paver shall be capable of paving the
carriageway as shown in the drawings, in a single pass and lift. Equipments or
accessory to support the edges of concrete by means of steel plates shall be
maintained in position by screwed jacks.
9.4.3 Where fixed form pavers are to be used, forms shall be fixed in advance as per
Clause 602.8. Before any paving is done, the site shall be shown to the Engineer, in
order to verify the arrangement for paving besides placing of dowels, tie-bars etc., as
per the relevant Clauses of these Specifications. The mixing and placing of concrete
shall progress only at such a rate as to permit proper finishing, protecting and curing
of the concrete in the pavement.
9.4.4 In all cases, the temperature of the concrete shall be measured at the point of
discharge from the delivery vehicle.
9.4.5 The addition of water to the surface of the concrete to facilitate the finishing
operations will not be permitted except with the approval of the Engineer when it shall
be applied as a mist by means of approved equipment.
9.4.6 If considered necessary by the Engineer, the paving machines shall be provided with
approved covers to protect the surface of the slab under construction from direct
sunlight and rain or hot wind.
9.4.7 While the concrete is still plastic, its surface shall be textured by brush or tines as per
the instructions of the Engineer in compliance with MORT&H Clause 602.9.8. The
140
surface and edges of the slab shall be cured by the application of a sprayed liquid
curing membrane in compliance with MORT&H Clause 602.9.9. After the surface
texturing, but before the curing compound is applied, the concrete slab shall be
marked with the chainage at every 100 m interval by embossing.
9.4.8 As soon as the side forms are removed, edges of the slabs shall be corrected
wherever irregularities have occurred by using fine concrete composed of one part of
cement to 3 parts of aggregate [1:1:2, cement : sand : coarse aggregate (10 mm
down) ] and fine aggregates under the supervision of the Engineer.
9.4.9 If the requirement of MORT&H Clause 902.4. for surface regularity fails to be
achieved on two consecutive working days, then normal working shall cease until the
cause of the excessive irregularity has been identified and remedied.
9.5 Construction by fixed form paver
9.5.1 The fixed form paving train shall consist of separate powered machines which
spread, compact and finish the concrete in a continuous operation.
9.5.2 The concrete shall be discharged without segregation into a hopper spreader which
is equipped with means for controlling its rate of deposition on to the sub-base. The
spreader shall be operated to strike off concrete up to a level requiring a small
amount of cutting down by the distributor of the spreader. The distributor of spreader
shall strike off the concrete to the surcharge adequate to ensure that the vibratory
compactor thoroughly compacts the layer. If necessary, poker vibrators shall be used
adjacent to the side forms and edges of the previously constructed slab. The
vibratory compactor shall be set to strike off the surface slightly high so that it is cut
down to the required level by the oscillating beam. The machine shall be capable of
being rapidly adjusted for changes in average and differential surcharge necessitated
by changes in slab thickness or crossfall. The final finisher shall be able to finish the
surface to the required level and smoothness as specified, care being taken to avoid
bringing up of excessive mortar to the surface by over working.
9.6 Construction by slip form paver
9.6.1 The slip form paving train shall consist of power machine which spreads compacts
and finishes the concrete in a continuous operation. The slip form paving machine
shall compact the concrete by internal vibration and shape it between the sides forms
with either a conforming plate or by vibrating and oscillating finishing beams. The
concrete shall be deposited without segregation in front of slip form paver across the
whole width and to a height which at all times is in excess of the required surcharge.
The deposited concrete shall be struck off to the necessary average and differential
surcharge by means of the strike off plate or a screw auger device extending across
the whole width of the slab. The equipment for striking-off the concrete shall be
capable of being rapidly adjusted for changes of the average and differential
surcharge necessitated by change in slab thickness or cross fall.
9.6.2 The level of the conforming plate and finishing beams shall be controlled
automatically from the guide wires installed as per MORT&H Clause 602.8 by
sensors attached at the four corners of the slip form paving machine. The alignment
of the paver shall be controlled automatically from the guide wire by at least one set
of sensors attached to the paver. The alignment and level of ancillary machines for
finishing, texturing and curing of the concrete shall be automatically controlled
relative to the guide wire or to the surface and edge of the slab.
141
9.6.3 Slip-form paving machines shall have vibrators of variable output, with a maximum
energy output of not less than 2.5 KW per metre width of slab per 300 mm depth of
slab for a laying speed up to 1.5 m per minute. The machines shall be of sufficient
mass to provide adequate reaction during spreading and paving operations on the
traction units to maintain forward movements during the placing of concrete in all
situations.
9.6.4 If the edges of the slip formed slab slump to the extent that the surface of the top
edge of the slab does not comply with the requirements of Clause 602.14, then
special measures such as fixing of side forms held in position by screwed jacks or
any other suitable device approved by the Engineer shall be taken to support the
edges to the required levels and work shall be stopped until such time as the
Contractor can demonstrate his ability to slip form the edges to the required levels.
Pavers with adequate width to pave the entire carriageway width in one go will be
employed. Paving in part width will be avoided, except in unavoidable circumstances.
In case of part width paving, care will be taken to ensure that while paving the next
lane bond between the old concrete and newly laid concrete is properly formed to
develop adequate bond strength between tie bars and concrete as specified in
IRC:58 (Appendix-4 of IRC:58). Care shall be taken to avoid damage to the previous
lane.
Work on next lane shall be permitted when the previously paved lane is cured for at
least 14 days and is in a position to bear the weight of paving machines. When the
wheels or crawler tracks are to ply on the already paved surface, necessary
precautions shall be taken by placing protective pads of rubber or similar material so
that texture is not damaged. The wheel or track shall be reasonably away from the
edge to avoid damage to the previously paved slab.
Upon the instructions of the Engineer, Contractor shall scrape the concrete surface
when in plastic state with a 3 m long tube float fixed with a long and stable handle
before texturing. Tube float shall be of an alloy steel tube of 50 to 60 mm diameter
with a long and stable handle. The length of tube float shall preferably be longer than
half the length of slab i.e., half the distance between two transverse contraction
joints. This operation shall be done to improve surface irregularity caused due to
varied causes like frequent stoppages of work, surface deformation due to plastic
flow etc. The tube float shall be placed at the centre of the slab parallel to longitudinal
joint and pulled slowly and uniformly towards the edges. After the use of float tube, it
shall be frequently cleaned before further use. The slurry removed shall be
discarded. This activity shall be advanced laterally by providing an overlap of half the
length of tube float. The removal of the cement slurry from the surface shall be
sufficient enough such that the texture is formed on a firm surface and is more
durable. This operation, however, shall be carried out after removing bleeding water.
This operation shall be done in the case of pavement construction using fixed form or
slip form paving technique.
9.7 Semi-Mechanized and Labour-Oriented Construction Technique:
Areas in which hand-guided methods of construction become indispensable shall be

got approved by the Engineer in writing in advance. Such work may be permitted
only in restricted areas in small lengths. Work shall be carried out by skilled
personnel as per methods approved by the Engineer. The acceptance criteria
142
regarding level, thickness, surface regularity, texture, finish, strength, of concrete and
all other quality control measures shall be the same as in the case of machine laid
work. Guidelines on the use of plants, equipment, tools, hauling of mix, compaction
floating, straight edging, texturing, edging etc. shall be as per IRC:15 (Clause 9.10).
9.8 Transition slabs:
At the interface of rigid and flexible pavement, at least 3 m long reinforced buried
slab should be provided to give a long lasting joint at the interface. The details shall
be as given in IRC:15 (Clause 9.10.11, Fig. 3).
9.9 Anchor beam and terminal slab beam adjoining bridge structures:
Cement concrete slabs will expand during hot season and this will result in the
building up of horizontal thrust on adjoining bridge structure. To contain this thrust
RCC anchor beams are to be provided in the terminal slab. The terminal slab also
needs to be provided with reinforcement to strengthen it. A typical arrangement of
anchor beam and the terminal slab are shown in Fig. 2 IRC:15. In case of culverts,
etc. where the concrete slabs are provided above the superstructure, there is no
need to construct anchor beams and terminal slab. In case the concrete slab abuts
with culvert structure, the construction of anchor beam and terminal slab will be
necessary. The details of anchor beams/terminal slab beam shall be as given in IRC:
15 (Clause 8.5.2, Fig. 2).
9.10 Surface texture
9.10.1 Tining: After final floating and finishing of the slab and before application of the liquid
curing membrane, the surface of concrete slabs shall be textured either in the
transverse direction (i.e., at right angles to the longitudinal axis of the road) or in
longitudinal direction (i.e., parallel to the centerline of the roadway). The texturing
shall be done by tining the finished concrete surface by using rectangular steel tines.
A beam or a bridge mounted with steel tines shall be equipped and operated with
automatic sensing and control devices from main paver or auxiliary unit. The tining
unit shall have facility for adjustment of the download pressure on the tines as
necessary to produce the desired finish. The tining rakes shall be cleaned often to
remove snots of slurry. The tines will be inspected daily and all the damaged and
bent tines shall be replaced before commencing texturing. Tined grooves shall be 3
mm wide and 3 to 4 mm deep. Before commencing texturing, the bleeding water, if
any, shall be removed and texturing shall be done on a firm surface. Normally,
transverse tining will be preferred.
Transverse tining:
When the texturing is specified in transverse direction, a beam of at least 3 m length

mounted with tines shall be moved in transverse direction to produce the texture. The
grooves produced shall be at random spacing of grooves but uniform in width and
depth. The spacing shall conform to a pattern shown below:
Random spacing in mm
10 14 16 11 10 13 15 16 11 10 21 13 10
143
The above pattern shall be repeated. Texturing shall be done at the right time such
that the grooves after forming shall not close and they shall not get roughened.
Swerving of groove patterns will not be permitted. The completed textured surface
shall be uniform in appearance.
Longitudinal tinning:
Longitudinal tinning shall be done, if specified in the Contract. The texturing bridge
shall be wide enough to cover the entire width of the carriageway but within 75 mm
from the pavement edge. The centre to centre spacing between the tins shall be 18
to 21 mm. The width of tine texture shall be 3 mm and depth shall be 3 to 4 mm.
9.10.2 Brush Texturing: Alternatively on the instructions of the Engineer, the brushed
texturing shall be applied. The brushed surface texture shall be applied evenly across
the slab in one direction by the use of a wire brush not less than 450 mm wide but
wider brushes normally of 3 m length are preferred. The brush shall be made of 32
gauge tape wires grouped together in tufts placed at 10 mm centers. The tufts shall
contain an average of 14 wires and initially be 100 mm long. The brush shall have
two rows of tufts. The rows shall be 20 mm apart and the tufts in one row shall be
opposite the centre of the gap between tufts in the other row. The brush shall be
replaced when the shortest tuft wears down to 90 mm long.
9.10.3 The texture depth shall be determined by the Sand Patch Test as described in the
MORT&H Clause 602.12. This test shall be performed at least once for each day‟s
paving and wherever the Engineer considers it necessary at times after construction
as under:
Five individual measurements of the texture depth shall be taken at least 2 m apart
anywhere along a diagonal line across a lane width between points 50 m apart along
the pavement.
No measurement shall be taken within 300 mm of the longitudinal edges of a

concrete slab constructed in one pass.
9.10.4 Texture depths shall not be less than the minimum required when measurements are
taken as given in MORT&H Table 600-3 nor greater than a maximum average of
1.25 mm.
Table 600-3 Texture Depth
Time of Test Number of Required Texture Depth (mm

Measurements
Specified Value Tolerance
1. Between 24 hours and 7 An average of 1.00 ±0.25

days after the construction, of 5
the slab or until the slab is first measurements
used by vehicles
2. Not later than 6 weeks An average of 1.00 +0.25
before the road is opened to 5 -0.35
traffic. measurements
144
9.10.5 After the application of the brushed texture, the surface of the slab shall have a
uniform appearance.
9.10.6 Where the texture depth requirements are found to be deficient, the Contractor shall
make good the texture across the full lane width over length directed by the
Engineer, by retexturing the hardened concrete surface in an approved manner.
9.11 Curing
9.11.1 Immediately after the surface texturing, the surface and sides of the slab shall be
cured by the application of approved resin-based aluminized reflective curing
compound which hardens into an impervious film or membrane with the help of
mechanical sprayer. Curing compounds shall contain sufficient flake aluminum in
finely divided dispersion to produce a complete coverage of the sprayed surface with
a metallic finish. The compound shall become stable and impervious to evaporation
of water from the surface of the concrete within 60 minutes of application and shall
be of approved type. The curing compounds shall have a water retention efficiency
index of 90 percent in accordance with BS Specification No. 7542 or ASTM-C-309-
81, type-2.
9.11.2 The curing compound shall not react chemically with the concrete and the film or
membrane shall not crack, peel or disintegrate within three weeks of application.
Immediately prior to use, the curing compound shall be thoroughly agitated in its
containers. The rate of spread shall be in accordance with the manufacturer‟s
instructions checked during the construction of the trial length and subsequently
whenever required by the Engineer. The mechanical sprayer shall incorporate an
efficient mechanical device for continuous agitation and mixing of the compound
during spraying. To give continuous covering, the curing compound may be sprayed
in two layers.
9.11.3 In addition to spraying of curing compound, the fresh concrete surface shall be
protected for at least 3 hours by covering the finished concrete pavement with tents
as described in MORT&H Clause 602.7.2, during adverse weather conditions as
directed by the Engineer. After three hours, the pavement shall be covered by moist
hessian laid in two layers and the same shall then be kept damp for a minimum
period of 14 days after which time the hessian may be removed. The hessian shall
be kept continuously moist. All damaged/torn hessian shall be removed and replaced
by new hessian on a regular basis.
9.11.4 The Contractor shall be liable at his cost to replace any concrete damaged as a
result of incomplete curing or cracked on a line other than that of a joint as per
procedure in IRC:SP:83.
10) Trial Length
10.1 The trial shall be constructed at least one month in advance of the proposed start of
concrete paving work. At least one month prior to the construction of the trial length,
the Contractor shall submit for the Engineer‟s approval a detailed method statement
giving description of the proposed materials, plant, equipment and construction
methods. All the major equipments like paving train, batching plant, tipping trucks
etc., proposed in the construction are to be approved by the Engineer before their
procurement. No trials of new materials, plant, equipment or construction methods,
nor any development of them shall be permitted either during the construction of trial
length or in any subsequent paving work, unless they form part of further approved
145
trials. These trial lengths shall be constructed away from the carriageway but with at
least a sub base layer below it.
10.2 The Contractor shall demonstrate the materials, plant, equipment and methods of
construction that are proposed for concrete paving, by first constructing a trial length
of slab, at least 100 m but not more than 300 m long for mechanized construction
and at least 50 m long for hand guided methods. If the first trial is unsatisfactory, the
Contractor shall have to demonstrate his capability to satisfactorily construct the
pavement in subsequent trials.
10.3 The trial length shall be constructed in two parts over a period comprising at least
part of two separate working days, with a minimum of 50 m constructed each day for
mechanized construction and a minimum of 25 m on each day for hand guided
construction. The trial length shall be constructed at a paving rate (speed, around 1
m/hr similar) to that which is proposed for the main work.
10.4 Transverse joints and longitudinal joints of each type that are proposed for dowel-
jointed reinforced concrete slabs in the main work shall be constructed and assessed
in the trial length. If in the trial length the construction of expansion joint and
longitudinal joint is not demonstrated, the first 2 expansion joints and at least the first
150 m of longitudinal construction joint for mechanized paving in the main work, shall
be considered as the trial length for these joints.
10.5 The trial length shall comply with the Specifications in all respects, with the following
additions and exceptions:
10.5.1 Surface levels and regularity
a.) In checking for compliance with MoRT&H Clause 902.3 the levels shall be taken at
intervals at the locations specified in this Clause along any line or lines parallel to
the longitudinal centre line of the trial length.
b.) The maximum number of permitted irregularities of pavement surface shall comply
with the requirements of MoRT&H Clause 902.4. Shorter trial lengths shall be
assessed pro-rata based on values for a 300 m length.
10.5.2 Joints
c.) Alignment of dowel bars shall be inspected as described in MoRT&H Clause

602.10.7 in any two consecutive transverse joints. If the position or alignment of the
dowel bars at one of these joints does not comply with MoRT&H Clause 602.6.5, if
that joint remains the only one that does not comply after the next 3 consecutive
joints of the same type have been inspected, then the method of placing dowels
shall be deemed to be satisfactory. In order to check sufficient joints for dowel bar
alignment without extending the trial length unduly, the Contractor may, by
agreement with the Engineer, construct joints at shorter intervals than the normal
spacing required in the Contract.
d) If there are deficiencies in the first expansion joint that is constructed as a trial, the
next expansion joint shall be a trial joint. Should this also be deficient, further trial
expansion joints shall be made as part of the trial length which shall not form part of
the permanent works, unless agreed by the Engineer.
146
e) Direction of Dowel bars/Tie bars: The direction of dowel bars/tie bars at the
curve portion shall be in such a way that these shall be radially in the direction of
the radii and parallel to the top surface. These shall also be perpendicular to the
direction of transverse joint and longitudinal joint at the middle of the slab depth
respectively. The direction of bonded portion of the dowel bars shall preferably be
in approaching side of the traffic and unbounded portion shall be on the side where
traffic is leaving the joint.
10.5.3 Density
In-situ density in trial length shall be assessed as described in MoRT&H Clause

903.5.2.2 from at least 3 cores drilled from each part of the trial length when the
concrete is not less than 7 days old. Should any of the cores show honey-combing in
the concrete, the trail length shall be rejected and the construction in the main
carriageway shall not be permitted until further trials have shown that modification
has been made which would result in adequate Compaction.
10.5.4 Position of tie bars
Compliance with MoRT&H Clause 602.6.6 for the position and alignment of tie bars
shall be checked by drilling additional cores from the slab unless they can be
determined from cores taken for density.
10.5.5 Minimum of thirty (30) beams for flexural strength and thirty (30) cubes for
compressive strength shall be prepared from the concrete delivered in front of the
paving plant. Each pair of beams and cubes shall be from the same location/batch
but different sets of beams and cubes shall be from different locations/batches.
Compressive and flexural strength shall be tested after 28 days water curing in the
laboratory.
At the age of 28 days, thirty (30) cores with diameter 150 mm shall be cut from the
pavement slab when the thickness of PQC is more than 300 mm. In case the PQC
thickness is less than 300 mm, the dia of core shall be 100 mm. The cores shall be
suitably cut at both ends to provide a specimen of plain surface on both ends. The
dia to height ratio of core shall be 1 to 2. (for cylindrical specimen of PQC of dia 150
mm, the variation in dia shall be + 0.5 mm, a tolerance on height shall be + 1 mm for
a specimen of cylindrical height 300 mm or more). The test shall be conducted as per
IS: 516.
Concrete in the member represented by a core test shall be considered acceptable, if

the average equivalent cube strength of the cores is equal to at least 85 percent of
the cube strength (characteristic strength) of the grade of the concrete specified for
the corresponding age (28 days) and no individual core has a strength less than 75
percent.
10.6 Approval and acceptance

10.6.1 Approval of the materials, plant, equipment and construction methods shall be given
when the trial length complies with the Specifications. The Contractor shall not
proceed with normal working until the trial length has been approved. If the Engineer
does not notify the Contractor of any deficiencies in any trial length within 10 days
after the completion of that trial length, the Contractor may assume that the trial
length, and the materials, plant, equipment and construction methods adopted are
acceptable after accepting the 28 days strength test cubes and cores interacted from
trial length.
147
10.6.2 When approval has been given, the materials, plant, equipment and construction
methods shall not thereafter be changed, except for normal adjustments and
maintenance of plant, without the approval of the Engineer. Any changes in
materials, plant, equipment, and construction methods shall entitle the Engineer to
require the Contractor to lay a further trial length as described in this Clause to
demonstrate that the changes will not adversely affect the permanent works.
10.6.3 Trial lengths which do not comply with the Specifications, with the exception of areas
which are deficient only in surface texture and which can be remedied in accordance
with MoRT&H Clause 602.9.8.6 shall be removed immediately upon notification of
deficiencies by the Engineer and the Contractor shall construct a further trial length.
10.7.1 Inspection of dowel bars
10.7.1 Compliance with MoRT&H Clause 602.6.5. for the position and alignment of dowel
bars at construction and expansion joints shall be checked by measurements relative
to the side forms or guide wires.
10.7.2 When the slab has been constructed, the position and alignment of dowel bars and
any filler board shall be measured after carefully exposing them in the plastic
concrete across the whole width of the slab. When the joint is an expansion joint, the
top of the filler board shall be exposed sufficiently in the plastic concrete to permit
measurement of any lateral or vertical displacement of the board. During the course
of normal working, these measurements shall be carried out in the pavement section
at the end of day‟s work by extending slab length by 2 m. After sawing the transverse
joint groove, the extended 2 m slab shall be removed carefully soon after concrete
has set to expose dowels over half the length. These dowels can be tested for
tolerances.
10.7.3 If the position and alignment of the bars in a single joint in the slab is unsatisfactory
then the next two joints shall be inspected. If only one joint of the three is defective,
the rate of checking shall be increased to one joint per day until the Engineer is
satisfied that compliance is being achieved. In the event of non-compliance in two or
more successive joints, the Contractor shall revert to the construction of fresh trial
lengths and make any necessary alteration to concrete mix, paving plant or methods
until the dowel bar position and alignment are satisfactory.
10.7.4 After the dowel bars have been examined, the remainder of the concrete shall be
removed over a width of 500 mm on each side of the line of the joint and reinstated to
the satisfaction of the Engineer. The dowels shall be inserted on both sides of the 1
m wide slab by drilling holes and grouting with epoxy mortar. Plastic sheath as per
MoRT&H Clause 602.6.5.5 shall be provided on dowels on one of the joints. The joint
groove hall be widened and sealed as per MoRT&H Clause 602.11.
11) Preparation and Sealing of Joint Grooves
11.1 General
All transverse joints in surface slabs shall be sealed using sealants described in
MoRT&H Clause 602.2.8 and as for IRC: 57.
11.2 Preparation of joint grooves for sealing
11.2.1 Joint grooves usually are constructed in first instance to provide the minimum width
specified in the drawings when saw cut joints are adopted. They shall be widened
148
subsequently by sawing before sealing. Depth/width gauges shall be used to control
the dimension of the groove. Grooves are constructed in first instance just to provide
a minimum width (3-5 mm) to facilitate development of cracks at such locations.
Subsequently before sealing, grooves are widened by sawing as per the dimensions
in the drawing. Dimension of the grooves shall be controlled by depth/width gauge.
11.2.2 If rough arrises develop when grooves are made, they shall be ground to provide a
chamfer approximately 5 mm wide. If the groove is at an angle up to 10o from the
perpendicular to the surface, the overhanging edge of the groove shall be sawn or
ground perpendicular. If spalling occurs or the angle of the former is greater than 10
degree, the joint sealing groove shall be sawn wider and perpendicular to the surface
to encompass the defects up to a maximum width, including any chamfer, of 20 mm
for transverse joints and 10 mm for longitudinal joints. If the spalling cannot be so
eliminated then the arrises shall be repaired by an approved thin bonded arrises
repair using cementitious materials.
11.2.3 All grooves shall be cleaned of any dirt or loose material by air blasting with filtered,
oil-free compressed air. The Engineer shall instruct cleaning by pressurized water
jets. Depending upon the requirement of the sealant manufacturer, the sides of the
grooves shall be sand blasted to increase the bondage between sealant and
concrete.
11.2.4 The groove shall be cleaned and dried at the time of priming and sealing.
11.2.5 Before sealing the temporary seal provided for blocking, the ingress of dirt, soil etc.,
shall be removed. A highly compressible heat resistant paper-backed deboning strip
as per drawing shall be inserted in the groove to serve the purpose of breaking the
bond between sealant and the bottom of the groove and to plug the joint groove so
that the sealant may not leak through the cracks. The width of deboning grip shall be
more than the joint groove width so that it is held tightly in the groove. In the case of
longitudinal joints, heat resistant tapes may be inserted to block the leakage through
bottom of the joint. When hot poured sealant is used. When cold poured sealant is
used a deboning tape of 1.0-2.0 mm thickness and 6 to 8 mm width shall be inserted
to plug the groove so that the sealant does not enter in the initially cut groove.
11.3 Sealing with sealants
11.3.1 When sealants are applied, an appropriate primer shall also be used if recommended
by the manufacturer and it shall be applied in accordance with his instructions. The
sealant shall be applied within the minimum and maximum drying times of the primer
recommended by the manufacturer. Priming and sealing with applied sealants shall
not be carried out when the naturally occurring temperature in the joint groove to be
sealed, is below 7°C.
11.3.2 If hot applied sealant is used (MAF more than 10 percent) it shall be heated and
applied from a thermostatically controlled, indirectly heated preferably with oil
jacketed melter and pourer having re circulating pump and extruder. For large road
projects, sealant shall be applied with extruder having flexible hose and nozzle. The
sealant shall not be heated to a temperature higher than the safe heating
temperature and not for a period longer than the safe heating period, as specified by
the manufacturer. The dispenser shall be cleaned out at the end of each day in
accordance with the manufacturer‟s recommendations and reheated material shall
not be used.
149
11.3.3 Cold applied sealants with chemical formulation like polysulphide/ polyurethene/
silicon as per IRC:57 shall be used when requirement of MAF is 25 percent or more.
These shall be mixed and applied within the time limit specified by the manufacturer.
If primers are recommended they shall be applied neatly with an appropriate brush.
11.3.4 The sealants applied at contraction phase of the slabs would result in bulging of the
sealant over and above the slab. Therefore, the Contractor in consultation with the
Engineer shall establish the right temperature and time for applying the sealant.
Thermometer shall be hung on a pole at the site for facilitating control during the
sealing operation.
11.3.5 Sealant shall be applied, slightly to a lower level than the slab with a tolerance of 3 ±
1 mm.
11.3.6 During sealing operation, it shall be seen that no air bubbles are introduced in the
sealant either by vapors or by the sealing process. The sealant after pouring shall be
allowed to cured for 7 days or for a period as per instructions of manufacturers.
12) Measurement of Texture Depth – Sand Patch Method
12.1 The following apparatus shall be used:
i) A cylindrical container of 25 ml internal capacity;

ii) A flat wooden disc 64 mm diameter with a hard rubber disc, 1.5 mm thick, next to one
face, the reverse face being provided with a handle;
iii) Dry natural sand with a rounded particle shape passing a 300 micron IS sieve and
retained on a 150 micron IS sieve.
12.2 Method: The surface to be measured shall be dried; any extraneous mortar and
loose material removed and the surface swept clean using a wire brush both at right
angles and parallel to the carriageway. The cylindrical container shall be filled with
the sand, tapping the base 3 times on the surface to ensure compaction, and striking
off the sand level with the top of the cylinder. The sand shall be poured into a heap
on the surface to be treated. The sand shall be spread over the surface, working the
disc with its face kept flat in a circular motion so that the sand is spread into a circular
patch with the surface depressions filled with sand to the level of peaks.
12.3 The diameter of the patch shall be measured to the nearest 5 mm. The texture depth
of concrete surface shall be calculated from 31000/(DxD) mm where D is the
diameter of the patch in mm.
The dimensions of Tining i.e. width, depth and land width shall be controlled by
depth/width gauge.
12.4 Measurement of Texture Depth – Tining
12.4.1 The following apparatus shall be used:
i) Tire Tread Depth Gauge A stainless steel tire tread depth gauge with graduations
with least count of 1.0 mm. The gauge end may be modified to measure depth
ii) A stainless steel caliper to measure spacing of tines. If necessary the caliper may be
modified to measure the spacing and width of tine texture. The gauge shall be used
after making necessary calibration.
iii) Wire brush

150
iv) Coborundum stone
v) Steel straight edge to remove snots etc. sticking to be surface. The straight edge
may be of 6 x 25 x 300 mm size.
12.4.2 Test Section

A unit of testing shall be 75 m per lane. If the length of construction is less than 75m
it shall be taken as one unit.
12.4.3 Test Procedure
In each 75 m section, along the diagonal line, 10 points shall be selected for making
checks of depth, width and spacing of tine grooves. The surface where tests are to
be conducted shall be cleared carefully with a wire brush or a steel straight edge or
using a corborundum to remove any upward projection of concrete. When the base
plate of the gauge is in contact with the concrete surface, the gauge shall be pressed
to the bottom of groove shall also be measured and recorded at this location. At the
same location, the spacing of tines shall be measured to verify whether the pattern
recommended in MoRT&H Clause 602.9.9.2 is complied or not.
12.4.4 Calculation
The average of depth and width at 10 locations shall be calculated and recorded to
the nearest 1mm. The spacing of spectrum measured at 10 locations shall be
recorded separately.
12.5 The average depth shall be within 3 to 4 mm. When the depth is less than 2.5mm
and in excess of 4.5 mm, the Contractor shall stop concreting till he corrects his tine
brush or replaces it. The sensors associated with work shall be again calibrated to
achieve the required texture. The textured groove less than 2.5 mm shall be re-
grooved using concrete saw at the cost of Contractor variation in texture width in the
range of 3+1 mm and 3 - 0.5 mm will be acceptable. Variation of width in excess of
this range, the contractor shall stop his work to correct his brush and technique.
When the spacing of spectrum is not satisfactory, the contractor shall replace the
entire brush.
13) Opening to Traffic
No vehicular traffic shall be allowed to ply on the finished surface of a concrete

pavement within a period of 28 days of its construction and until the joints are
permanently sealed. The road may be opened to regular traffic after completion of
the curing period of 28 days and after sealing of joints is completed including the
construction of shoulder, with the written permission of the Engineer.
14) Acceptance Criteria in Quality and Distress
i) Tolerances for Surface Regularity, Level, Thickness and Strength:
The tolerances for surface regularity, level, thickness and strength shall conform to
the requirements given in MoRTH Clause 903.5. Control of quality of materials and
works shall be exercised by the Engineer in accordance with MoRTH Section 900.
151
ii) Tolerances in Distress :
The acceptance criteria with regard to the types of distresses in rigid pavement shall
be as per IRC: SP-83. “Guidelines for Maintenance, Repair and Rehabilitation of
Cement Concrete Pavements”. The cracks (of severity rating not more than 2) which
may appear during construction or before completion of Defect Liability Period shall
be acceptable with suggested treatments as given in Table: 600-4. In case of PQC
slabs having cracks of severity rating more than 2 i.e. cracks of width more than 0.5
mm for single discrete cracks, multiple and transverse cracks and cracks of width
more than 3 mm in case of longitudinal cracks and of depth more than half of the
PQC slabs, shall be removed and replaced.
15) Measurements for Payment
15.1 Cement Concrete pavement shall be measured as a finished work in square metres
with specified thickness. The volume to be paid for will be calculated on the basis of
thickness and plans shown on the drawings and adjusted for the deficiency in
thickness. No additional payment shall be made for extra thickness of the slab. The
full payment will be made for this item after 28 days strength of the concrete is found
to be satisfactory. Interim payment may be made after 14 days of curing.
The unit for measurement for concrete pavement shall be the cubic metre of concrete
placed, based on the net plan areas for the specified thickness shown on the
drawings or directed by the Engineer. The rate shall include all provisions of these
Specifications and shall include the provision of all materials, their storage, polythene
film, concrete, mixing, transport, placing, compacting, finishing, curing together with
all formwork, and including testing and submission of test certificates and records.
The unit rate as entered in the Bill of Quantities shall also include all costs of
contraction, expansion, construction, and longitudinal joints. It shall also include
provision of joint filler, caulking rod, debonding strip, sealant primer, joint sealant.
15.2 Pavement thickness
All precautions and care shall be taken to construct pavements having uniform
thickness as shown on the plans.
A day‟s work is considered as a „lot‟ for calculating the average thickness of the slab.
Average thickness of the slab shall be within tolerance limits prescribed in Table 900-
1. No extra payment shall be made for the thickness more than the thickness
prescribed in the drawing.
16) Rate
The Contract unit rate for the construction of the cement concrete shall be payment in full
for carrying out the operations required for the different items of the work as per these
Specifications including full compensation for all labour, tools, plant, equipments, testing
and incidentals to complete the work as per Specifications, providing all materials i.e.
aggregates, dowel bars, tie bars, PVC membrane, cement, stabilizers (lime, cements or
any other stabilizers accredited by IRC) etc. to be incorporated in the work including all
royalties, fees, storage, rents where necessary and all leads and lifts. No separate
payment will be made for construction of trial length and the tests carried out on the
same.
152
ITEM NO: 12
Providing Thermo Mechanically Treated bars (TMT bars) FE - 415 for R.C.C. work
including cutting, bending, binding, hooking, tying and placing in position as per
detailed drawings incl. cost of binding wire etc. complete at all levels as per
specification. For chairs separate measurements will be taken and paid.
1. The relevant portion pertaining to specifications of reinforcement under para 3.0

specifications for plain, reinforced cement concrete shall apply to this.
2. The measurement shall be in Kg.
3. The rate includes cost of required materials, plants, labour, fabrication, placing in
position etc. to complete the item.
ITEM NO: 13
Providing and fixing Guard stone as per I.R.C. type design including white washing
etc. Completed as per detailed specification.
Fixing in C.C 1:5:10

1 . The guard stone shall be of approved quality and of 20 cm x 15 cm. size and its length
shall not be less than 75 cms. The top portion shall be rounded. The top 38 cm. shall be
chisel dressed on all sides. The size, shape and dimensions of the guard stones shall be
exact and shall be neatly dressed and finished.
2. The guard stone shall be fixed in position as directed by the Engineer-in-charge in C.C
1:5:10. Which will consist of one part of cement, five part of good sand and ten parts of
good brick bats. If the guard stone shall be fixed in wearing coat, the equivalent volume
covered by the guard stones shall be deducted from the gross measured quantity of
wearing coat. The exposed part of the guard stones shall be given three coats of white
wash. Any excavation necessary for fixing of the guard stones shall be done by the
contractor at his own cost; the measurement for payment shall be per number of guard
stone fixed in position.
3. Unit rate of guard stone includes the cost of all materials, labours, tools, curing, fixing &
white washing as directed by the Engineer-in-charge.
4. In case of Deep/Causeway the guard stone shall be fixed in masonry of head wall as
directed by Engineer-in-charge.
153
TENDER NO. 2/CSR/LR/2011
Construction of Box-culvert on Hankaran

at
Lignite Project
Rajpardi
Tal: Jhagadia,
Dist: Bharuch
VOLUME - II
PRICE BID
CLIENT:- CONSULTANT:-
Mars Planning and Engineering Services

GUJARAT MINERAL DEVELOPMENT Pvt. Ltd. , 601 Surmount Building ,
CORPORATION LIMITED Opp. Icons Mega Mall,
(A Govt. of Gujarat Enterprise) S. G. Highway
Khanij Bhavan, Near University Ground, Ahmadabad 380015
132 feet Ring Road,
Vastrapur, Ahmedabad-380 052 Phone: +91-79-40026333
Phone: (079) 27913200, 27913501
Fax No: (079) 27911454
Website www.gmdcltd.com
1
Name of Project: - Bid Documents for Construction of box culvert on Hankaran Nallah near Bhuri Village at Lignite Project
GMDC. Rajpardi.
SCHEDULE -B, ABSTRACT (GRAND SUMMARY)
Sr. Amount (In Rs.)
Description
No. In Fig. In Words
1 (B1) Construction of RCC Bridge & Retaining Wall
(B2 ) Construction of bridge approaches with footpath at both side of the
2
bridge
GRAND TOTAL
Note :- Rate includes completing the work within 7 (seven) months
(A) Total Tendered Amount ( B1 + B2 ) in Figures: Rs.
(B) Tender Amount Above- %

Tender Amount Below- %
( C ) Net tendered amount (A+B) or (A-B)

Rs……………………………………..
( in words Rupees …………………………………………………………………………………)
Signature of Contractor.
The General Manager,
Khanij Bhavan, 132 Ft Ring Road,
Nr. University Ground,
Vastrapur, Ahmedabad-380 052.
Name of Project: - Bid Documents for Construction of box culvert on Hankaran Nallah near Bhuri Village at Lignite Project
2
GMDC. Rajpardi.
SCHEDULE – B1
Construction of RCC Bridge & Retaining Wall
Sr.No. Description Quantity Rate Per Amount
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 Marking of the centre line along longitudinal axis and etc 1.00 LS
with total station theodolite including making drawings as
per detailed specification and directed by engineer in
charge .
2 Excavation for foundation in sand, gravel clay soft soils, soft 250.00 M3
rock, bentonit, clay and moorum etc. including shorting
strutting and dewatering as necessary and disposing of the
excavated stuff as per detailed specification and directed.
3 Providing & filling in foundation with ordinary cement 36.00 M3
concrete M 100 mix and providing necessary vertical pin
headers including formwork vibrating ramming & curing
complete. As per detailed specification.
4 Providing and casting in situ controlled cement concrete 105.00 M3
M.250 for R.C.C. work raft cut off walls as per drawing
including centering shuttering where necessary laying
vibrating curing and finishing complete including curing with
all machineries, additives if required manpower, vibrators,
tools & tackles etc.as per detailed specification.
(A) Raft
5 Providing and casting in situ controlled cement concrete 18.00 M3
M.250 for R.C.C. work in piers abutment and R.C.C.return
as per drawing with all machineries, tools, tackles, vibrators
including centering shuttering scaffolding where necessary
laying vibrating curing and finishing complete as per
detailed specification, cost inclusive of mix design to be
approved by consultant/client.
(A) R.C.C. returns
3
6 Providing and casting in situ controlled cement concrete M.
250 for R.C.C. Work in superstructure including centering
shuttering scaffolding ramming vibrating curing and
finishing complete. as per detailed specification, cost
inclusive of mix design to be approved by consultant/ client.
(B) Balanced Cantilever box type super structure
(I) Top slabs 90.00 M3
(II) Column 36.00 M3
7 Providing Thermo Mechanically Treated bars (TMT bars) 20400.00 Kg.
FE - 415 for R.C.C. work including cutting, bending,
binding, hooking, tying and placing in position as per
detailed drawings and specification incl. cost of binding wire
etc. complete at all levels. For chairs separate
measurement will be taken and paid.
8 Providing and laying filter media 600 mm. Thick as directed 70.00 M2
at the back of abutments returns and wing walls as per
detailed specifications.
9 Providing G.I. 100 mm. Diameter water spouts including 10.00 No.
necessary iron gratings as per drawings and detailed
specification.
10 Providing and casting situ controlled cement concrete 15.00 M3
M.150 for average 75mm. Thick wearing coat laid as
directed including tamping vibrating finishing curing
centering and shuttering if required and filling in joints with
bitumen complete, concreting and shuttering if required. as
per detailed specification.
11 Providing 20 mm. Thick remolded asphalt filler joint as per 8.00 M2
drawings and detail specification.
12 Providing parapet of control cement concrete M200 as per 51.00 RMT
detailed drawing with necessary reinforcement including
shuttering, laying, vibrating and finishing to line and level
complete as per detailed specification.
4
(ii) Cast in situ
13 Providing and applying 2 coat of polymer to be applied on 7.00 M2
construction joint before half an hour of new concrete as
per detailed drawings and detailed specification by
Engineer and as per site requirements.
14 Providing and laying for dry stone pitching of 22.5 cm thick 7.00 M3
including preparing the surface etc. comp. by compacting
etc complete as per detailed specification.
15 Providing Panel wall for dry stone pitching in uncoursed 3.00 M3
rubble masonary with hard stone of approved quality in
cement mortar 1:5 including curing etc. complete. as per
16 Providing and laying weep hole in column and returning by 12.00 RMT
using P.V.C pipes of 100 mm. Diameter including laying in
proper grade and joining etc. comp as per detailed
specifications.
TOTAL Rs.
Say Rs.
5
Bill Of Quantity For Construction of Box Culvert on Hankaran Nallah near Bhuri Village at Lignite Project GMDC. Rajpardi
SCHEDULE: B2
Construction of bridge approaches with footpath at both side of the bridge
Sr. No. Description Quantity Rate Per Amount
Earth work for embankment with selected soil having CBR value not less than 7
% and M.D.D. not less than 19.50 KN/M3 brought from approved quarry located
outside the ROW limit with all lead and lift, transporting to site, spreading in
layers not more than 25 cm (loose) by approved means, dressing, grading to
required slope, watering, rolling & compacting with the help of a vibratory roller of
1) 330.00 M3
minimum 80 to 100 KN static weight with plain drum in layers, whichever is
suitable as per site condition to achieve the desired density at O.M.C. including
filling the depression which occur during the process in required line, grade &
slope as per "L" section & given drawing or as directed (As Per detailed
Specification attached ) incl. all taxes, royalties etc. complete
Earth work in cutting in all sorts of soil and soft Murrum including Macadam /
Asphalt roads & jungle cutting for new road, widening of Road Re-sectioning &
Profile correction of Road & other Road structures etc. as per detailed drawing
and detailed Specifications attached with suitable means as approved including
cutting and loading in tippers, trimming bottom and side slopes, in accordance
2) with requirements of lines, grades and cross sections, and transporting to the 50.00 M3
embankment location within the boundary limit including all lifts and lead from
the end of cutting & spreading in required layer and dressing the excavated stuff
for embankment for road portions as per detailed drawing incl. Clearing and
grubbing road land as per detailed specification attached etc. complete as
directed
6
Providing, spreading, mixing by mix in place,dressing & compacting close
graded materialGrade- III as per gradation of MORTH withspecified 65 % sharp,
clean graded sand havingCBR not less than 10 %, 35 % Crushed blacktrap
aggregates of size 12 mm to 50 mm fromapproved quarry located outside the
ROW limitincluding all required leads & lifts in a layer of notmore than 150 mm
Thick compacted andspreading in uniform layer in such loosequantities that the
thickness of each compactedlayer should not be less than requiredcompacted
3) thickness of layers shown on thedrawing on well prepared base / sub-base /sub- 55.00 M3
grade by using a motor grader , dressing,watering, mixing by mix in place
method with rotavator at OMC, compacting with vibratoryroller of minimum 80 to
100 KN static weight withplain drum or heavy pneumatic tyred roller ofminimum
200 to 300 KN weight having minimum tyre pressure of 0.70 MN/M2 ,whicheveris
suitable as per site condition to achieve thedesired density at O.M.C. including
filling thedepression which occur during the process all lead & lift , all taxes,
royalty etc. complete as directed and as per detailed specification.
Providing, spreading, mixing by mix in place, dressing & compacting close
graded material Grade- I as per gradation of MORTH with specified 30 % sharp,
clean graded sand having CBR not less than 30 %, 70 % Crushed black trap
aggregates of size 12 mm to 75 mm from approved quarry located outside the
ROW limit including all required leads & lifts in a layer of not more than 150 mm
Thick compacted and spreading in uniform layer in such loose quantities that the
thickness of each compacted layer should not be less than required compacted
4) 55.00 M3
thickness of layers shown on the drawing on well prepared base / sub-base /sub-
grade by using a motor grader , dressing, watering, mixing by mix in place
method with rotavator at OMC, compacting with vibratory roller of minimum 80 to
100 KN static weight with plain drum or heavy pneumatic tyred roller of minimum
200 to 300 KN weight whichever is suitable as per site condition having minimum
depression which occur during the process all lead & lift , all taxes, royalty etc.
7
Providing, Laying, spreading & compactingspecified graded M.C. black stone
aggregate ofspecific size to construct the compacted base for bridge
approaches on each side to wetMix Macadam Specifications (As Per MoRTH
Specifications Clause No.406) incl. premixing theMaterial with water at OMC in
mechanical mixplant , carriage of mix material by tipper to site,laying in uniform
required layer in such quantitythat the thickness of each compacted layershould
5) not be less than the required compactedthickness of layers shown on the 85.00 M3
Drawings ofeach layer with a hydrostatic paver finisher withsensor control to the
required lines, grade, leveland cross - sections as shown on the drawing inbase
course on a well prepared underbase / sub-base, compacting with
Tandemvibratory roller of minimum static weight of 80 to100 KN to achieved the
desired density incl.lift, all taxes, royalty, materials, labours, plant and
equipments etc. complete as directedand as per detailed specification.
Providing & applying Primer coat with Bitumen Emulsion (Grade-MS) complying
with IS : 8887 at the rate of 0.60 Kg. per Sq m of Road area over prepared
surface of granular base (As Per detailed Specifications attached) by using
Bitumen pressure distributor for spraying the primer uniformly at the rates 0.60
Kg. per Sq m of road area and temperatures with self heating arrangement ,
6) heating bitumen, cleaning the road surface as per MoRTH specifications etc. 305.00 M2
complete incl. applying a very thin layer of clean sand to the surface of primer to
prevent the primer picking up under the wheel of pavers and tippers including all
labour charges and cost of all materials involved in the work, transporting
charges, material testing charges & Incidental charges etc. complete as directed
and as per detailed specification.
8
Providing & applying Tack coat with BitumenEmulsion (Grade-MS) complying
with IS : 8887at the rate of 0.25 Kg. per Sq m of Road areaover prepared
surface of granular base (As Perdetailed Specifications attached) by
usingBitumen pressure distributor for spraying theprimer uniformly at the rates
0.25 Kg. per Sq mof road area and temperatures with self heatingarrangement ,
7) heating bitumen, cleaning the roadsurface as per MoRTH specifications 305.00 M2
etc.complete incl. applying a very thin layer of cleansand to the surface of primer
to prevent theprimer picking up under the wheel of pavers andtippers including
all labour charges and cost ofall materials involved in the work,
transportingcharges, material testing charges & Incidentalcharges etc. complete
as directedand as per detailed specification.
Providing and laying bituminous macadam with 100-120 TPH hot mix plant
producing an average output of 75 tonnes per hour using crushed aggregates of
specified grading premixed with bituminous binder, transported to site, laid over
8) 35.00 MT
a previously prepared surface with paver finisher to the required grade, level and
alignment and rolled to achieve the desired compaction as per detailed
specification.
Providing and laying 20 mm Compacted thicknessMixed Seal Surfacing (As Per
detailedSpecifications attached) on preparedsurface as wearing course using
BitumenEmulsion (Grade-MS) complying with IS: 8887 fortack coat at rate of 2.5
kg per 10 Sq.m. and 5.80 MTmix material per 100 M2 for laying 20 mm
thickM.S.S. using machine crushed black stoneaggregate & filler materials as
per gradation andPaving Bitumen of penetration grade -S65 or A65(Grade -
9) 60/70 As Per IS : 73) at the rate of 5.10 %by weight of total mix as binder using 18.00 M2
Drum MixPlant & electronic sensor paver finisher incl.loading of aggregates with
front end loader, hot mixingof stone aggregates & bitumen in Drum Mix
Plant,transporting mixed material in tipper to paver withall lead & lift, laying mix
materials with electronicsensor paver finisher with electronic sensingdevice for
automatic leveling & profile controlhaving at least 7.0M screed as approved to
therequired layers, level and grade, rolling with a set ofrollers: 80-100 static
9
weight smooth wheeled (3wheels or tandem) & 80-100/60-80 KN
smoothwheeled tandem vibratory roller to achieve thedesired density, providing
& operating plantmachineries & equipments, cost of aggregates,bitumen, sand,
fuel, oil & lubricates, all labour charges and cost of all materials involved in
thework, transporting charges material testingcharges and incidental charges
incl. flushing ofstone dust/ / sand if required etc. complete asdirected and as per
Construction of dry lean cement concrete Sub-base over a prepared sub-Base

with coarse and fine aggregate conforming to IS: 383, the size of coarse
aggregate not exceeding 25 mm, aggregate cement ratio not to exceed 15:1,
aggregate gradation after blending to be as per table 600-1, cement content not
to be less than 150 kg/ cum, optimum moisture content to be determined during
10) 9.00 M3
trial length construction, concrete strength not to be less than 10Mpa at 7 days,
mixed in a batching plant, transported to site, laid with a paver with electronic
sensor, compacting with 8-10 tonnes vibratory roller, finishing and curing incl.
maintenance of Diversion, all required lead and lift, all taxes, royalty etc.
Construction of Continuously Reinforced Cementconcrete Pavement in M - 30

Mix as per approved mix design over a prepared sub-base, with cementcontent
(Minimum 450 Kg per M3) as per approvedmix design, course and fine
aggregates conforming to IS:383, maximum size of course aggregates
notexceeding 25 mm, mixed in a batching and mixingplant as per approved mix
design, transported to site, laid with a fixed form or slip form paver,
11) 20.00 M3
spread,compacted and finished in a continuous operationincluding necessary
provision of Expansion,contraction, and longitudinaljoints, joint filler, 125 micron
thick separation membrane of impermeable Geo textile non- woven membrane,
sealant primer, joint sealant, deboning strip, tie rod, Super plasticizer admixture
IS marked as per 9103-1999 @ 0.5 per cent by weight of cement as approved,
finishing to lines and grades as per drawing & MoRTH Specifications including
10
curing of concrete for 14-days, maintenance of Diversion, all requiredlead and
lift, all taxes, royalty, approval of mix design from consultant/client etc. excluding
cost ofreinforcement etc complete as directedand as per detailed specification.
Providing Thermo Mechanically Treated bars (TMT bars) FE - 415 for R.C.C.
work including cutting, bending, binding, hooking, tying and placing in position as
12) 1500.00 kg
per detailed drawings incl. cost of binding wire etc. complete at all levels as per
detailed specification. For chairs separate measurement will be taken and paid.
Providing and fixing Guard stone as per I.R.C. type design including white
13) 22.00 No.
washing etc. Completed as per detailed specification.
TOTAL Rs.
Say Rs.
11
12

DTP Final 14032011 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

DTP Final 14032011 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

TENDER NO: 2/CSR/LR/2011

Construction of Box-culvert on Hankaran

Mars Planning and Engineering Services Pvt.

Name of Work: T.no- 2/CSR/LR/2011, Construction of Box-culvert on Hankaran

S.N. Chapter Title & Description Page Nos.

5 III Check List of Documents Enclosed With Tender 13

6 IV Criteria for Evaluation of Technical Bids (Form A 14 -18

7 V General Instructions to the Bidders 19-21

8 VI General Terms & Conditions 22-26

12 Technical Bid- Part II 1-164

03 Location At lignite mines, Rajpardi Tal: Jhagadia,

04 Tender Fee Rs. 1500/- by Cash/D.D.

06 Total Estimated Cost Rs. 27,58,000/-

07 Earnest Money deposit (1%) Rs. 27,580/- By D.D. of Nationalised or

08 Security Deposit 5 % of contract value (including EMD) in

10 Work Completion Time. 7 months

11 Date and time for On or before 17 -3-2011 up to 18.00 hrs

5. Tender will be considered only of those parties having Provident Fund

7. Bidders who wish to participate in this tender will have to register on

(n) Code Solution

8. Contact details for officer at given below address :

General Manager (CSR)

TENDER NO. 2/CSR/LR/2011

The owner, M/s. Gujarat Mineral Development Corporation Limited, Ahmedabad

Name of Work : Construction of Box-culvert on Hankaran Nallah near Bhuri village

Decision of the GMDC Management regarding pre- qualification based on the

All decision to award the work will be made by employer.

Dated Signature & Stamp of the Contractor

INSTRUCTIONS TO THE BIDDERS

THE TENDER & THE OFFER:

- Technical bid documents are to be submitted on line. However, the

- To be submitted on line before the stipulated time.

a. e-tendering procedure is explained in detail in Chapter – II.

b. Preliminary bids will be opened after verification of receipt of payment

c. On verification of the supporting documents, technical qualification of

Sometimes issue of Corrigendum may be necessary to clarify doubts raised or to

e- Tendering (Online Tendering) Instruction to Bidders

Further details of this tender are as under

Sr. No. Particulars Declaration (Strike

Following details are requested to be furnished with documents to qualified in

Service Tax No.

13 Provident Fund Registration Number Yes/ No

16 Prices/Charges- Accepted Yes/No

18 I. T. and other taxes Deduction.- Yes/No

Deviation sheet to be attached by the

Declaration I & II in prescribed

5. Centering and shuttering

1) Decision of the Management regarding the technical qualification is final and

2) It is desirable to furnish all information with necessary documents.

1. Any conditional Tender will not be entertained and will be rejected.

6. Tenderers are expected to quote competitive and workable rates.

8. Quantity mentioned in schedule of quantities against each item is only for

13. No mobilization advance shall be given by GMDC for this contract.

16. Tenderer is required to submit a copy of PF registration number received from

18. Successful Tenderer is supposed to enter in to an agreement with the

2) Payment Terms and Running Bills:

Invoice/ Bill should be sent in duplicate. [Please mention our LOI/Work

MODE OF PAYMENT OF RUNNING BILLS:

An advance payment of RA bill will be paid at 75% of the amount payable

Balance 25 % amount of Running Bills become payable at project after

B Retention money deposit will be deducted from RA bills @ 5 % of the

D Security deposit at 5 % of the contract value exceed than tendered

G RA bill must be submitted along with the names of the employee

Herewith D.D. / Pay Order NO _____ Dated Of